UC-NRLF

TE2 T3M

A.

COREAN MANUAL
OK

PHRASE BOOK:
WITH

IXTRODUCTORY GEAMMAR
BY

JAMES 8C0TT,
H. B. M,'h
Vice Consul.

M.A.,

8ECOXD EDITION*

Seoul

EnctLish CHtEcn Mission Peess.

1893,

L6 n

b-^t

73.

07

fao3

PREFACE,
In issuing a Second Edition of
for

my

Manual,

would venture

to solicit

my

labours the kindly consideration of critics and scholars.

The Corean
of

language presents so

many

difficulties

both of grammatical construction and

verb inflection that the task of the student who attempts to acquire a mastery There are no native grammars of the of its colloquial is well nigh hopeless.

language; and the only vocabulary used by Corean scholars

is

the

Oh P'yen

3S^'

a Chinese Dictionary which gives the Corean transliteration of the sounds

of the Chinese Characters with their

meanings in Chinese.- Although one of the most ancient tongues of Asia, the influence of Chinese literature and civilization early led Corean scholars to relegate the study of their vernacular to a
subordinate place in public estimation.

The
is

native aspirant for

official

position

and

literary

honours devotes himself entirely to the study' of the Chinese classics

and

all official

and other correspondence

script.

conducted in Chinese

t<2>-

the exclusion

of the

Corean

the Fathers of the French Mission in Corea belongs the distinction of having compiled the first Dictionary and Grammar of the language monu-

To

ments

of painstaking accuracy

and erudition.

of the colloquial, I ventured in 1887 to

As an introduction publish a Corean Manual

and

to the

study
novice

collection

of sentences prefaced by a few grammatical notes intended to

help

the

over the
inflection

first difficulties

of the language

to indicate those essentials of

noun
the

and verb conjugation which require especial study and consideration.

that,

These sentences met with so favourable a reception

in

deference

of

expressed wishes of Corean students and others, I have retained them in

niucli;

making only such alterations as the spoken language has shown to be necessary said
their original form,

a fuj'tlier acquaintance with

useful.

added

to the present edition is explanatory of the

The nev/ mattergrammar and especially o: V-v>

#,i i ^f>,'^n

verb conjugation, and

will, it is

perhaps prepare the

way

to a

present volume I have striven

in the study of the language
;

hoped smooth the course of future students, and more complete and graduated text book. In the to embody the results of my own tentative efforts
is

it

in short, the fruits

total of our

of

my own my

experience

and a slender contribution to the small

In conclusion,
to the
it

knowledge of Corean speech.

is

my

pleasant duty to record

acknowledgments

Rev. M. N. Trollope of the English Church Mission in Gorea for much and valuable assistance in revising the proofs and for many important emendations and suggestions as the volume passed through the Press. To Bishop Corfe

am

also

bound

to

convey

that he generously placed at

my sincere thanks for the special printing facilities, my disposal in publishing the present Edition.

May, 1893,

THE
VOWELS.

COREAIS^

ALPHABET.

..

INDEX.
Introduction

History and origin of the Corean alphabet

l-XXl

PAaB.

ALPHABET
Consonants
Aspirated checks
Reduplicated checks and sibilant
Trills

2
3

4
.

Euphonic changes

4
.

Table of consonant sounds

6
11

Vowels
Pronunciation and
transliteration

11

Table of vowel sounds

13

Diphthongs
Pronunciation and transliteration

15
15

NOUNS

..

18

Paradigm of case suffixes Form and use of case suffixes Number, gender, &c.
Table of declensions
(1)
.

18
19 21

Root ending in

k,

m, ng, n and

22

22
(3)
(4)

(sometimes p)

23
24
25

vowel

Exercises i-iv

PRONOUNS
Personal

29
29
31 31
.

Demonstrative
Possessive
Interrogative
Reflexive
Indefinite
..

32
33

34
35 36

Relative

Exercises v-viii

Pronominal substitutes

40 42
42

NUMERALS
Cardinal

.. . . . . .

'. . . . .

. ..

^
Ordinal

INDEX.
Paok.

43 45
. .

Abbreviated form of nnmerals

Fractions and multiples

Numeratives

. .

. .

*
*

45
47

Exercises ix-xiii

Divisions of time, seasons, &c

Days

^to-day,

to-morrow, &c
'

54
..
"..'

Exercises xiv-xv

..

..

56 ^^
"^
"'*

ADJECTIVES
Conjugation of adjectives
Exercises xvi-xviii
. .
. .

..
.

. .

Comparison of adjectives
Exercises xix-xxi

. .

. .

. .

"'

..

..

..

,.

..

o8
71

VERB
Polite

..

..

Ordinary conjugation

..
. .

..
.
.

..
. . .

73 ^^
91

Interrogative Conjunction
I.

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

93 94 96
97

Conditional suffixes myen^ keteun

Exercise xxii

. .

. .

II. Casual suffixes ni^ nikJca, nikkanteuro, tent

Exercise xxiii
III. Adversative suffix

. .

99
100 102 103 106

wanan
. .

..
.
.

..
. .

..
.

..
. .

..
.

..
.

Exercise xxiv

IV. Concessixe su^xes na^

Exercise XXV
..

tai, to, kenioa, chirato

.. .. ..

..

..

..
..

....
'. ."

V. Deliberative and alternative

(a) na, kena
..

..

..

.. ..

..

.. ..

,,
..

107

Exercise xxvi

,,

..

..
..

..

109

(6) nanka, nanchi, tenchi, chi, nenchi

..
.. ..

..

.,
.. .,
..

,110
113 116
117

Exercise xxvii-xxix

..

..

..

..

VI. Restrictive conditional

Exercise XXX,
..

suffix

ya
..

.,
.. .. ..

.,
..

..
.. ..

..

VII. Temporal suffixes

to^a,

wyewsye
..

..

..
..

..
..

118
120 122
122

Exercises xxxi-xxxii

..

..

VIII. Suffix ka with verbs " to fear," &c

Exercise xxxiii
.. ..
.. ..

..

..

.. ..
..

Future Perfect Tense

Exercise xxxiv

..
..

.. .. ..
.. ..

.. ..

122 123
124

.,

Gerundive
(1) ra, re, lla,

He

..

..

,.

..

. , . , . . . , . .

. . . . . . .

INDEX.
Exercises xxxv-xxxvi
(2) rya.rye .. Exercise xxxvii
..
.

m
Pass.
. . . .
.

-r,

. .

. .

. .

125 127

..
.

'..
. .

..
.

..
. .
. . . .

. .

127

Auxiliary verbs
ckouta,

(1) Ota, kata, {2) pota

{2,)

..

..

..

,.

..

..

..

128
129

{'i)

hata
..
..

Exercise xxxviii

..

..

,,

.,

..

..

130
131 131

Negation.
(1) an, ani, {2)

mot

..

..

..

..

..

..

..
.

(3) (a) chianta, (b) chi

mot h&ta, chi ani Mta

. .

(c) chi
. .

malho,
.

etc,

Exercise xxxix

.....
.,
.. .. ..

132 133

Demonstrative verb
Exercises xl-xli

ilta
..

"to be"
..

..
..

..

.. ..

,. .,

.,

134
136
137
137

Vbbbal nouns.
(1) in i

and

/^

..

.,
..
*

.,

,. ..

..
.. ..
, .

..

.. ..
..
.

,.
.. ..
.

(2) in choul, choullo

,.
..
. .

..

Exercises
(3) in chil

xlii-xliii

..
.

..
. .

..
. .

and

noriXt
..

139
139

Exercise xliv

..

..

..

..

.,
i

,,
.

..
.

Adverbs derived from verbs and adjectives

Exercises xlv-xlvi
. . . .

in kei
.

and
. .

or hi
. .

140 140

Causative AND PASSIVE verbs

Exercise xlvii
. .

..
. .

..
. .

..
. .

..
. .

..
.

..
,

..
.

142
142

Idiomatic uses of the verb

(1) tdiro, manle (2) Present

. .

. .

. ,

. .

. .

143
143

eum

..

..

..

.,

..
. .

..
. .

..
,

..
.

and future

relative participles
. . . .

143
144

(3) kochyah&ta, kosipouta (4) mcheuhhdta (5) chi as {a)

.

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

144
145 145

an

infinitive, {h)

an interrogative
{b)

. .

. .

(6) ^niwre in {a) rita ov orita,

ma,

.. ;.

..

..

...
..
.

.. ..
.

(7) Imperfect or pluperfect in tera (8) Relative participle in teran

..
.

..
. .

145 145
146

. .

Exercises xlviii-xlix

. .

. .

ADVERBS
(1)

Time

..

148
150
151

(2) Place (3)

Manner

(4) Degree (5) Negation and affirmation

..

152
153 153

..

,,

.,

..

..

,,

POSTPOSITIONS

..
.*.'

CONJUNCTIONS

154

. .

. . .

. . ,

.. . . . .

. . . . . .

.. . . .

. . . .

jy

INDEX.
Pas.

Exercise

155
1

Il^DIRECT ^VEECB.
Exercise
li-liii

{oratio obliqua)
.

156
157
!<><>

'

DOUBLE IMPERATIVE
Exercise
liv
..

" to tell " or " to order," &c.

..

^^'^

EXERCISES.
1-13. General conversation
14. Trees, flowers, weeds, &c.
15.
..

..
..

....
..

..

..

162

..

1^8
l^^
1^2

General conversation

....
..

..

.'.

16.

Domestic animals

..
.. ..

..

17. Well, wall, coolies, digging

18. Travelling

194
. ..

horse,

chair, &c.
..

196 198

19.

Road, baggage, &c.

20. 21.

Wind, mist, clouds, &c The different parts of the body,

.

200

&c., blind, lame, &c.

.
.

. .

202
204
206
208

22. Inn, room, dinner, sleep

23. Points of the compass,

N.

S.

E.

W
.. ..

24.
25.

Hunting
Money,
silver,

trading

..
.

..
.

210

26. Shopping, silk, piece goods, gauze, sables, skins, &c.

c, '^^-

212
,.
'^^^

/Tastes

sweet,

IColoursRed,

sour, &c. \ white, &c./

28. Rice, peas, beans, barley, &c.

..

..

.. ..
.

..

..
..
.

..
..
.

216
218

29. Agriculture, rainbow, thunder, hail

30. Ice, water, soap
;

..
. .

..
.

Royal procession

220 222

31. Saddle, pony, bull 32. Linen, cotton, grasscloth, spectacles

33. Building operations, 34.
.

224
226
228

brickman, lime,

roof, &c.
.

Chimney, blacksmith, paper-hanger, &c.

.

35. Fever, small-pox, ague, &c.

....
. .

.
."

230
232 234

36. Doctor, medicine

37. Prisoners, robbers, &c.

. .

..

..
.

..
.

..
.

..
.

..
.

..
.

38.
39.

Warfare, soldiers, rebels

236
238

General conversation

. .

. .

40.

Household utensils

..

..

..

..

..

240

INTEODIJCTION.
The Corean alphabet as originally invented
in 1447

A.D. contained twenty-

eight distinct letters, classified and explained by native scholars as (1) initials, (2) finals and (3) medials.
I.

Eight

letters

used either as

initials or aS finals

COREAN MANUAL.

as read in

^1

for

(soft or

modulated)

O
m
read
1

spiritus

lenis.

n (faint nasal)
h (spiritus asper)

The character [^] is to be read not as a Chinese ideograph but with the has In modern Chinese sound of its equivalent meaning in Corean, viz k'i. replaced the ancient sound and meaning of ^, which, in this connection, must be
:

''yenff,

where the

initial

is

intended to reproduce the sound of the Sanscrit

palatal n as used in the gt f^ IE bI phonetics. III. Eleven letters used as medials or vowels

as

m m
1

ya
e (o or u)

ye (yo or

yti)

yo

^
*
-I-

ou (u)

you (yu)
eu in
i

eu?i^

4&
But as
at

a in the

sd.

present employed

Corean alphabet contains these eleven

the initials three letters early
letter

vowels and only fourteen consonants.

From among

disappeared from their script and were replaced by the

initial,

which, as an

had

in its turn lost the nasal

np sound, and now represents a purely open

vowel

initial

corresponding to the

spij'itus lenis.

The history of the invention of

highly interesting philologically.

the alphabet and especially

of the euphonic

changes which the language has

is

undergone, both in speaking and in writing,

careful study of the early

pronunciation of the Chinese ideographs will show

clearly

how

these four letters

O A 15

Ci

came

to be included under one phonetic

INTRODUCTIONS^
as the
initial.

The

letter

was employed

to indicate a pure
lenis,

open vowel

initial

with the force and usage corresponding to the spiritus

regularly in old books and especially in manuscript works.

and as such appears

modification has ever

No
;

occurred as regards the sound

writing
it

it

was invented

to represent

but in modern Corean

has ceased to appear as a distinct circle somewhat like our English iigure

aero (0), and has

now assumed a shape analogous

letter

to the nasal n^ ending, viz to

O-

The

triangular

was originally selected

indicate

an

initial

consonant J as heard in the Chinese words

At

M?

&c.

This initial ; sound, however, is totally unknown to Coreans and only appears in this instance as an attempt to reproduce the Chinese pronunciation of

the fifteenth century A. D. at the time of the invention of their alphabet.

these words jwssessed a distinct
transliterated
fi

Anciently

instead of j as their initial consonant and were

into Corean accordingly,

though

this

n has now disappeared from

modern Corean in common with the euphonic change still visible in Corean enunciation, whereby the initial n sound is made to disappear before the vowel i and The modern pronunciation in Cantonese and Japanese of its allied semi-vowel y.
Chinese words

now read with

_;,

fidly establishes this n

sound as the correct value

first

of the ancient initial in the third century A. D.

when Chinese symbols were

introduced into Japan

from Corea.
is

In Japan, however, in addition to this Go-on

H ^,
table

as

it is

called, there

drawn from China

of a

direct towards the close of the sixth century.

a concurrent j pronunciation known as Kan-on J|| ^, A comparative

few of the more

common words

occurring in Buddhist liturgies

is

century,

here appended, giving their Corean transliteration as originally used in the fifteenth as also their pronunciation in Japanese and in the Shanghai dialect.
as the initial, but the latter sounds prove the
;

The former shows the presence of ^'

true value of the original n as the initial

while as regards modern Corean this n

has been dropped in accordance with the laws regulating Corean euphony.
Chinese.

Bmiahist


IV

COREAN MANUAL.
^1*

niakii

zah

yak
a or vei

a
the sphittis lejus
letter

^1

nei
letter

While the use of the Corean

A was

regularly employed in Buddhist

books to transliterate the sound of J, the words themselves in ordinary colloquial were invariably pronounced with a true open vowel and accordingly written with

^^ their initial

the triangular form disappearing as a

still

distinct

from the current script of the people.

The
n(/

letters

"S and

(J)

were selected to represent two nasal sounds

n and

resi^ectively of ancient

Chinese

and

heard in Cantonese, in Shanghai

and

in other dialects of China.

;

As

faint nasal initials they

have early disappeared

from Corean

an open vowel

initial

sound took their place and the words are now

always written with the spiritua lenis

Q.

But

in

Buddhist books giving the

is

Corean transliteration of the Sanscrit, the value of this n

indicated by the letter 1$.

The following are a few of the more common Chinese characters appearing
in Buddhist Rituals representative of this n as

an

initial

5g

la

N*

^
^]
"vei

o^
"ai

6^

ak
the nasal initial

'am

As regards

7}g,

modern Corean has dropped the sound

lenis.

entirely, leaving only the

open

initial

vowel written with the spiritus

But

the Corean transliteration of Sanscrit sounds, as also the pronunciation of modern Japanese and Cantonese, all agree in retaining the regular nasal ng as the initial

sound but represented in Japanese by

hinese.

g.

INTRODUCTION.
Tlie

attempt ou the part of the C'oreau

scliolars

in the

15th ceutury to

reproduce by means of the letters

initial,

A "o

<[)

the diiferences between the oi)en vowel

w</,

the sonnd of ^' and the two nasal initials n and

however praiseworthy from

For, however distinct such

pliilolotjical

point of view, was early

doomed
in

to failure.

shades of pronunciation might be to the ear of educated Coreaus, the people generally

were
sounds

incapable
j,

of

differentiating
7fg

their

daily

vernacular

the

faint

initial,

nasal n and

sounds

which had early disappeared from their language

distinct letter

iind in which the / initial

had originally no separate place as a

separate and distinct voc^ilizations
resorted to the letter
spin'UfS lenis.

the
(

nasal n fulfilling

its

functions.

In their script, therefore, the people discarded the

;

use of

A^
zero

nud

as

and treating the

\
/

sounds as open vowel

-cipher

initials,

corresponding to our English

in

and indicating the

But

course of time

fully
<J>

a
(in

century and half later

this simple circular letter

is
<J>,

<'^ud

the nasal final

which the upper stroke

to result in the
iis

merely an appending hook) became so assimilated as

modern
its

which as an

initial

is

now always mute, and used

it

a " proconsonant " corresponding to the true spiritus lenis-, while as a final
original pronunciation
tifj

continues to retain

a strong distinct nasal.

The question of these phonetic changes and the modifications accxn-dingly of their alphabet by the Coreans are two points intimately associated with the
:ancient pronunciation of the Chinese ideographs as originally intrmluced into the

country in the eleventh century B. C. and especially at the time of the Buddhist

propagandism

in

372 A. D.

The chief

feature requiring special attention in this

jiroiinnciation of Chinese,

res])ect is the identity

between the Corean and C^antonese

final in Corean.
:

with one exception

in

but an exception that only accentuates the

I

rule

of the

final

Cantonese being invariably replacetl by

In their transliteration
n,

of Chinese, Coreans give six

transliteration of their

letters as finals, viz

k,

L m,

and

ng.

But

in the

these six but a final

It
is

as well,

own vernacular Coreans possess and constantly use not only making seven finals in all for their own language.

therefore evident that in rendering the sounds of Chinese words, Coreans were

not debarred by any special defect in their vocal organs from pronouncing a final t. Thus the natural inference is that the sounds of Chinese ideographs as originally

taught to Coreans, contained no

the
final,

as a final but were regularly pronounced with

as

and

this latter

sound has been passetl on accordingly from generation to

Z

generation.

On

the other hand, the Chinese are incapable of sounding

final:

they

are equal only to the utterance of that letter

when

initial
is

and no

dialect jmssesses

regular

final in its pronunciation.

;

The question
but whatever

an interesting and imjwrtaut

there
is

factor for the philological student

to consiler that
t\\e

its solution,

every reason

when the

Cliinese ideogra])lis

were

first

introduced into Corea from

originally in
of

now pronouncetl by Cantonese with t as the final, ended and no Chinese word thea ended in t. Regarding the pronunciation Chinese, apart from the evidence supplied by dialects, it is not until the fourth
north (f China, words
/,


vi

(KOREAN MANUAL.
The i)ropagation
and Liao
I

centnry A. D. that the student can find himself on sure ground.

of the Buddhist religion had shown the necessity of some authorized standard for the
transliteration of its Ritual into ('liinese
i\

from the original Sanscrit

"J*

^,

learned priest during the time of the

Tung-chin dynasty
initial
])y

^^
Yo
tlie

(A. D. 40(J), selected

thirty-six

Chinese ideographs to represent the

consonants of the Sanscrit

alphabet.

These phonetics, afterwards modified

Slien

the collaboration of certain Hindoo priests, continued to be of Sanscrit in

C'hinese
until

j^ f^ (A. U. 500) with standard jn-onunciation

finally

reduced to thirty-one phonetics

cerebrals

A. D.
^tlie

1376,

when they were

revised

and

three characters j^
tlie

\^ representing three
palatals
;

of the
;

Sanscrit being included under

corresi)onding

i%

under

and

under

the sounds respectively being considered identical

in Chinese.

These thirty-one ideogi-aphs are now known as the "

Phonetics of

Yiin"

^ ^ IE tl 77^^
;

Hmg Wu

(the first

Hung Wu Cheng Emperor of the Ming

dynasty).

These phonetics form an important link in the

liistory of the invention

of the Corean alphabet

will supply the

and a comparison of them with the Sanscrit equivalents

lett^ers.

key to the grouping and pronunciation ef the Corean

interesting

At

the same time they are equally

as

regards the Corean value of the

sound of the C/hinese [ideographs and illustrate certain modifications that have occurred in aspirates or have otherwise aifected the language.

The

initial

sound of each ('hinese phonetic was intended to represent the

value of a corresponding letter in Sanscrit and, tabulated as

known and used by

the
Sanscrit

Corean scholars
1.

in the fifteenth century, they

show as follows

The

initial

consonant sound in j^.

^, ^,

represents

gutturals n, h, kh and g ; which in C^orean passed into (7ig), (/-) and The Sanscrit sonant gh found no equivalent in Chinese. In^ {It) respectively. Corean all distinction between surd and sonant has been neglected colloquially

the two sounds are interchangeable but

speaker, and accordingly the Corean

made

unconsciously on the

i)art

of the nasal

y
;

may
its

be read k or g.
??,

The

initial

of the

Corean corresponding to

tlie

Sanscrit

early disappeared as a distinct initial

was always so faint that it had place was taken by the spiritas leyiis
its

represented by the circle

Q-

w^ii^^^^

again in

turn became modified until

it

resembled the present nasal

final

^ a
in

series of

changes naturally resulting from

the Corean system of writing down the i)age with a Chinese pen or brush.
2.

The
cJ,

initial

consonants

^, ^, ^,
(/?)

n,

t,

th

and

which

in

Corean jmssed into l*

:

^ represent the c (0 ^^^ S

Sanscrit dentab
^'^e

(^')-

Sanscrit

while in Corean all distinction of surd and dk had no equivalent in Chinese Fonant was neglected and only one letter t required as an initial with its
aspirated form f.
3.

In C'Orean the

trill

here follows,

being defined as the

initial

sound

in the Chinese character which in these phonetics

was
is

selected to rei)resent the

Sanscrit semi-vowels

and

r.

In (-orean this

trill

properly a sound ranging

IXTRODUCTION.
l)etween the two j^^'onuuciatious, uenrer r as an
best be exphiiued as a soft, modified
/

vii

iuitiiti

but approaeliino^ what

may

wlieu

final.

But

iu transliteratiug Chinese

words possessiug:

as

tlie initial,

the C'oreans were unequal to the true phonetic value

/

of the letter, and while retaining

wherewith to indicate the original sound, they

/

modified and merged this distinct

pronunciation of the Chinese root into

??,

and

then, following the peculiarities of the C\)rean vocalization of this letter they further

modulated
sound.
(

this v

and

finally

dropped

it

in

many words

as a distinct initial consonant

is

This principle affecting the value and sound of n

likewise exemplified iu

'orean
;?,

of

luive

by the transliteration of the Sanscrit guttural, cerebral and palatal sounds which as initial consonant sounds have entirely disappeared from Corean they been regularly replaced by the open vowel initial.
;

4.

In transliterating the Sanscrit labials w, ^,

jjh

and

h the

Chinese introduced

a variation in their pronunciation, iu order to express the distinction of sounds in

and

h wlien

modulated and softened intoy and v

resjiectively.

These allied sounds

the Chinese classified as /^^ffryand liijht labials. The heavy labials are Bfl. ^. 3& and correspond exactly with the Sanscrit m, p, ph and b whereas the three are considered light hibials and represent the modified correscharacters ^, ^^.
;

ponding sounds of

f,

(defined in Chinese as f. clear)

and

f (defined

as

f thick),

derived respectively from m,

carried fidly into
;

and

b.

This divergence in pronunciation has been

modern C-hinese, giving m, p and p' {p aspirated) the heavy labials while w and f reproduce the light labials the aspirated or thick / as above disappearing. The Corean vocalization on the other hand, is characterized by No regard was paid to any distinction between great simplicity and reguhirity. surd and sonant, nor did the aspirated p ever pass into / as seen in Chinese and

in our

modern English, where ph has the

force

and value of/.

The Corean letters D B JE were taken to represent the Sanscrit m, p and ph {p aspirated). As regards the Chinese, however, there can be no question but they intended to represent the Sanscrit semi-vowel that in selecting the ideograph

?%

a sound entirely

unknown

iu Corean.
bh.

Neither in Chinese nor in Corean

is

there

any equivalent of the Sanscrit

In short
it

mav

well

be regarded as the invariable rule that where

to

appears as the initial sound of words in modern Mandarin pronunciation, its place modulated m in Corean and by v in the is taken bv b in Japanese, by a soft or

Shanghai
5.

dialect.

and Chinese characters ^, i|||^ we discern the attempt to reproduce the sounds respectively of the Sanscrit palatals c, ch and jh and cerebrals t, th and dh. But in Corean with no distinction between palatal and
In the use of
tlie

^^

cerebral

or between

surd and sonant, these sounds became conjoined and were

:

represented by two letters, viz

7C=r// and y;,=cU

initial
;,

(eh

aspirated).
in
it

The Chinese,

however, were further able by means of the

sound
calling

such words as

15 g,, &c., to indicate the value of the Sanscrit

half palatal and half

viii

CORE AN MANUAL.
tlieir

cerebral.

Tlie

Coreans in

first

attempts to formulate an alphabet, followed

the (Hiinese classification of sounds of the fifteenth century A. D. and invented the
triangular letter

to represent this ; of the Chinese.

But, as nlvendy explained,

the pronunciation of this sound was outside the range of their current vocalization.

The

letter itself early

initial,

disappeared from their alphabet and was replaced by the open

vowel

which indicates the regular pronunciation of the Coi'ean vernacular.

7?

Originally in C-orean these (lu'nese derivatives were read with

this

as their initial,

and

n
91

is still

used in Japanese pronunciation of Cliiuese ideographs.

it

But

in

\)reau

the

sound was always faint and modulated until eventually

still

was dropped

phonetic modification

exemjilified in the
??

words

jiurely (/Orean in their origin,

before the vowel

modern vernacular, where as regards /, &c., is constantly elided and

made

to disappear as a distinct initial consonant sound.

6.

and f^ the original intention in iJ was to indicate the variants between s and z. As regards and H, the object was to mark the UKKlificatious of these two sibilants s and z into sk and zh respectively, i.e., where the sibilant is softened by the i)reseuce of an ontbreathing. While and s/t have remained as distinct regular sounds iu modern Chinese, the two initials 2 and s// have undergone certain modifications, jiassing into
of the Chinese characters
respect to their selection

By means

,s

/is

and sh according
/(siek

to the position of the outbreatlu'ug.

Thus

iu Maudai'in is

now pronounced

and

j||

as s/^ath

This latter Chinese character has, however,

c/t'

a strong aspirate when used iu Buddhist books, ranging in value from

ck^an to s (aspirated),*ap])roac]iing

aspirated of

z (aspirated) ins/tan of the modern

selectetl to represent

jn'onunciation.
tlie

These four Chinese j)houetics were

sibilants
;

the sounds of

Sanscrit

but to the Corean ear such minuteness of distinction was too cumbersome
letter

and only one

sounds.

(s)

was required

to represent

these four

Chinese

initial

At

the same time the yalue of the original sounds was not without

its effect

on the

j)ronunc,iation of the
initial

Corean transliteration, and

s/i,

in

many Chinese words now

according as the

commencing with an

we

find Coreans likewise modifying their initial s

to'^^/' oi'l/ts

sound and unconsciously reproducing an approximation

outbreathing/c follows or precedes the sibilant
s.

In

-hinese

words originally showing

z&s
is

their initial, Coreans

now
is

follow their s sound by ay, but so modified tliat the s

into the pronunciation of the vowel immediately
its

emphasized while the y

merged

following with the effect of lengthening

7.

value.
to

So

far

the

Chinese

had adhered
dentals,

the

Sanscrit
sibilants.

classification

into

gutturals,

})alatals,

cerebrals,

labials
asj)irate,

and

But

in

regard

to the vowels

or

semi-vowels and the

this strict sequence

and identity
distinction

of correspondence between their phonetics and the Sanscrit alphabet could no longer

be maintained.

In resj)ect to words o])ening with a vowel sound, a

was drawn
modified

in the (/hiuese ])honetics

initial.

nasal n as the
in

between an open clear vowel initial and the For the former the character l^ was' selected

and read you or yu

Corean, and as written

the circle

was taken as

mTRODUCTION.
indicative of
its

ix

value as an open

initial.

On

the other hand, instead of the open

initial

vowel

initial

the nUsal n appears in certain Chinese sounds as their

^,

which,

when

followed by the vowels y or

were read with an enunciation corresponding

n was very
faint,

with the n in Spanish.

scarcely perceptible.

Only

in Chinese this initial

and as a nasal

But the sound had

its distinct

presence and influence on the

language, so

much

so that in the fifteenth century

:

the Coreans invented a special

circle

letter to indicate its individuality, viz

composed of the
(

of the spirittis

lenis

with a diacritical

mark

like a

hyphen

over

it,

thereby representing the

affinity

of the two sounds, both in writing and in pronunciation.

The Chinese

character

with

its

original sound of

"^yeng,

for

which the character

initial

waa

subsequently used, was selected as the phonetic typical of this

semi-vowel.

But the true use and value of

from
its

this nasal

n as an

initial

can be best studied

Corean pronunciation, both as regards words indigenous to the language and especially in derivatives assimilated from Chinese, where there is a regular tendency
to elide the nasal

n before y

or

?.

Thus

COREAN MANUAL.
8.

As regards

aspirates, the Chinese maintained the distinction

as-

between the

soft sibilant aspirate

etc.,

approximating nearest to the sound of sh and the guttural aspirate proper in horn, etc. and the two characters selected and g, read respectively in Corean as representative of the two sounds were has not, however, the distinct aspirate sound ; it contains kyo and hap. This h in rather the rudiments of a faint s modified by an outbreathing and generally written
;

heard in pleasure,

hs for the transliteration of Chinese ideographs.

Both

in Cantonese

and Corean the

h,

pronunciation agree in ignoring this s sound and retain the regular aspirate
1iiu=hyo.

viz

But

in Shanghai and Peking the presence of the 5 sound asserts itself to

the exclusion practically of the aspirate proper, and

{h^z=.ks)

is

then read Kio in Shanghai

and ksiao in Peking. In the Corean vernacular both sounds

is

were

represented by

'',

but in
the

pronunciation this letter

found passing regularly into a modified

s before
is

Towels

or y.

This change from a guttural aspirate to a sibilant aspirate

unconsciously by Coreans, while on the other hand, the true sibilant

itself, in

made many

words as uttered by uneducated Coreans, passes into a regular aspirate. As originally

invented this letter
(hs, sh),
''

was intended

to represent the

sound of the sibilant aspirate

"q"

while in order to

mark

the proper guttural aspirate h the letter

was to

be reduplicated, thus
the two sounds
;

'^Q=hh, thereby accentuating the identity and affinity of and in many books, even as late as the seventeenth century, thia
occurs constantly in

combination of

letters indicating the strong guttural aspirate

Buddhist
this

liturgies.

initial

Accordingly the Chinese character |g, the representative of consonant, was first transliterated in Corean 'o'^=hhap. But this

nicety of distinction

was early abandoned as too cumbersome

'o

and regardless of
the pronunciation

philological accuracy the letter

"^^^

made

to represent both the guttural or true

aspirate

and the

sibilant aspirate
||^,

indiscriminately.

As regards
:

of the Chinese character

all
is

the ancient sound, as also the Corean and Cantonese,

agree in the value of h as the strong guttural aspirate, viz

hap.

In Shanghai

it

also read ha with the regular aspirate, but in modern Mandarin the guttural has

given place to the sibilant aspirate, and

^ always read hsia

fertile

the proper transliteration

of such sounds

{lis,

h\

sh, etc.)

has been a

source of learned disquisition by

sinologues and others.

But the general consensus is that the outbreathing of the aspirate precedes the sibilant, and that hs rather than sh indicates the correct
pronunciation.

These thirty-one phonetics of

groups

Hung Wit supply

the key to the order and

into

arrangement of the Corean alphabet.

The sounds were divided

two main

thick each again divided into wholly and p^ less, iH clear and according as the pronunciation of the letter was soft or hard. Unaspirated letters

came under
gutturals,

j^, aspirates

under j^, while sonants proper were classed under

labials,

tJij

j^.

Followiug the Sanscrit classification these sounds were farther subdivided into
palatals,

dentals,

sibilants,

aspirates,

etc.

In

regard to the


INTRODUCTION.
pronunciation of these phonetics, Coreans were at the time of the invention
their alphabet

xi

or

guided not by the sounds with which they themselves read the

Chinese ideographs, but by their value and use as current in China at the beginning
of the fifteenth century.
scholar
frontier

For

this special purpose the Coreans consulted the Chinese

^^

Huang

Ts'an, then living as

an

exile

from China on their N.

W.
^^
^,i

beyond the Yaloo River.

Several missions were sent by the

King of Corea

to obtain his assistance in elucidating the correct

characters.

We

pronunciation of the Chinese can thus understand and explain the Chinese and the Corean

vocalization of these phonetics, in several of which the differences are very

marked
But

and important.

In these phonetics the Chinese characters are to be read with their

sounds as recognized in the early years of the Ming dynasty A. D. 1400.

according to Corean scholars, the Corean pronunciation of Chinese goes back to the
eleventh century B.C., and shows great modifications as compared with these phonetics^

The ideograph Q

is

transliterated

il

in Corean, but the presence of a faint nasal

in Japanese.

can be traced in some dialects of modern Chinese and especially

ancient reading of the character
nasal n
this
is

n The
and

acknowledged to be

nyit,

and the sound of the

may best be defined may help to supply the

as ranging between the Sanscrit palatals

J and n

clue to the divergence in the pronunciation of

as nichi

in Japanese, n^ik in

Shanghai, compared with jih of the Ming dynasty and of

modern Mandarin.
before the vowels
i

The disappearance of
or

this

initial

?i

in

Corean

is

in

strict

conformity with the principles regulating Corean euphony, whereby this

initial

y passes
:^,

into a faint nasal

and

finally

disappears as a

distinct sound, both in their vernacular

and especially

in their

pronunciation of

Chinese.

Compare
;

L=|

which

is

transliterated

nyeheiil

but read yeheul (a

;

cascade)

L^

transliterated

nyer&m but read yeram (spring)

Finally,

*^ Ah ^|

nipsakoui

but read ipsakoui (a

leaf), etc., etc.

we have only

to study the regular

pronunciation in the Shanghai vernacular to understand and appreciate the true

value and use of this nasal n as an
initial.

and |^ the true Corean transliteration gives no aspirate as here shown in these phonetics they are written f^ and >^ and read kyei and pang
respectively

As regards

in the

forms ?^ and

^,

k'yei

and p'ang, we have merely a reproduction

of the Chinese pronunciation of that period.

As

regards aspirates generally, the

it is

Corean pronunciation of Chinese presents so many anomalies that

lay

impossible to
are constantly

down any definite law governing

their connection

and

use.

Words
:

occurring in Corean

words

which have long been assimilated into the language

jo,

possessing strong aspirates, especially with the initial

such as

;^

=
==

P'a;
p'ai
p'j-o etc.,

WL

==

P'an;
p'il

A
iJi^

BR

^
which

= =

P'al
p'il

in Chinese are

marked by no

aspirate.


xii

COREAN MANUAL.
The two characters

^ and ^^

are rendered p]

and

HI in

Corean

but in the

table of these phonetics, in order to indicate that these sounds are merely approxi-

heavy or strong and $2 light placed under the light or accordingly and are the two characters modulated; or modulated^ in order to show that the m and p sounds of the Corean transliteration mate, the labials are divided into two categories
require to be softened and modified so as to approach the Chinese pronunciation of

u (=:v=w)
proper, viz
:

in wei

and of /
:

in fei.

In Corean, however, there are only two labials

and j,

for the aspirated jo is never modified

into^but always remains

to

distinct labial, viz

as

p followed by a strong outbreathing. While Coreans did not require any special form of letter distinct from swds the two sounds being interchanged

mark

sonants
daily
;

in

their

speech, yet the authors of the

alphabet were fully aware of the difierence

and

finding that the checks and sibilant were pronounced in

Corean with a special

emphasis- so as to produce a
this peculiarity of the

new and

allied sound, they very accurately represented

Corean language by reduplicating these consonants, thereby same time their true value and pronunciation, viz yj=kk=g ; HH= ppz=b ; tZ}[Z=ii=d; 7;^=chch=j and m=s5=. And these reduplicated letters were originally intended to convey the sound and pronunciation of the sonants y, b, d, J and z as found in the Hung Wu phonetics. This principle was likewise carried into the aspirate, which in its guttural form they represented by ^'Q=hh in contraindicating at the
:

distinction to sibilant aspirate

^=hs

or sh.

This reduplicated form, indicating the

;

true aspirate, appears regularly in Corean transliterations of Buddhist books

but in

modern writing the two sounds are no longer difierentiated, though

the sibilant and guttural aspirates regularly occur.

in their colloquial

Hung

Wu phonetics

with their

The following Table shows the corresponding Corean letters and sounds
:

INTRODUCTION.

xui

^
^] m

^x

^
7

f:
22 ff

7i
^b

^ ^

>7

H M
J

"
D
I

cc

^j-

^ ^

HH

m
^1 A^
IE
03^

Z2.

n
JA

A
m

2:

^ X
>a

X
o

-^

#
^S.

^
4i

ft-

tt

en

xiY

COREAN

MAjS^UAL.
in ascribing the

Both Buddhist and national records concur

ing the Corean alphabet to the fourth

honour of invent;

King of the present dynasty

publication.

year A. D. 1447 as the date of

its official

and assign the The President of the Board of

subject,

Ceremoniesin the proclamation he issued in terms of the Royal Edict on the

recapitulates the great advantages accruing to the Corean student in possessing an

alphabet equal to the correct transliteration of native words and Chinese ideographs.

He refers

especially to the

clumsy system introduced by Syel Ch'ong |^ ^ the Buddhist

seventh century A. D.,
arbitrarily

priest who, towards the close of the

selected

certain Chinese characters to represent Corean inflection and agglutination on the

same

principle as the Japanese

now

use their

Kana
still

characters (fg ^).

And

this

Ifido 1^ 1^ syllabary, as it has been termed, petty officials hence the name.

remains in constant use among

The present Corean

aljjhabet 'owes its

origin to the

promptings of native
that all States having

ambition on the part of the King and Government to figure as an independent State.

The Corean Envoys

Chinese.

at the Court of the

Ming Emperors found

and
script of their

relations with China, possessed a literature

school

of languages had long been established in

official interpreters

own and distinct from Nanking for the

purpose of training Chinese as

and

for

conducting correspondence

with neighbouring countries in their own vernacular.

mark

the individuality

The King of Corea, eager to and independence that he claimed for his State, was desirous

of abandoning Chinese as the official script of his Government. of the Envoys

in use

With

the assistance

who had

acquired at Nanking a knowledge of the

viz.,

difi^erent

alphabets
;

Mongol, Thibetan, Burmese and which was then largely studied in connection with Buddhist liturgy and ritual, the King evolved the present Corean alphabet, consisting of twenty-eight letters (now reduced to twenty-five) and ordered its adoption by his
especially of Sanscrit,

by countries bordering on China,

Native conservativism, however, proved insurmountable, and Cliinese has continued to be used as the medium of correspondence, both by officials and by the educated classes generally the native

people and

officials

to the exclusion of Chinese.

script being relegated to

women and

the uneducated masses.

But

for purposes of education, especially in transliterating Chinese, the

;

alphabet has a recognized place

and the Chinese

classics

Corean have accordingly been

rendered in the vernacular to assist the student to the correct meaning and pronunciation of Chinese ideographs.

While drawing on the Hung

and order of
their letters.

Wu phonetics as

above explained for the lounds

direct for the form of appearance of Buddhism in Corea at the end of the fourth century A. D., Sanscrit has been regularly studied by the Corean priesthood, who were long the sole repositories of literature in the country and wielded a

their alphabet, the Coreans

went to the Sanscrit

Since the

first

powerful influence accordingly.

Even

as late as the seventeenth century, Corean


IXTRODUCTIOy.
monks made a
its

XV

special study of Sanscrit

and

wi'ote learned disquisitions elucidating

history in connection with Chifiese

and Corean.

The Sanscrit alphabet passed from India through Thibet into China, and by it finally reached Corea the letters had been subjected to great modifications, necessitate from the circumstance that they had to be written, down the page/ with a Chinese pen or rather brush, instead of horizontally with the Indian reed. Again
the time

under Corean hands this Sanscrit alphabet was further transformed,

print difiers from English writing

much

as English

the Coreans curtailed and modified the square or

into- a short cursive script for

angular shaped letters of the Sanscrit

speed in wi-iting.

convenience and

And

it is

from

this cursive script that the

Coreans have evolved

the form and construction of the letters of their alphabet.

In addition to the consonants of the Sanscrit alphabet, the other

all variously altered
;

letters

were

and modified the divergences in some instances being very marked

all

and

striking.

But these changes may

of

be studied in the exemplars given in the

Buddhist Ritual of Incantation, known as the Chen

transliteration
in 1778 A. D.

En

Chip

g*

^, an

early Corean

the Sanscrit original with their Chinese equivalents re-published

This work likewise contains some interesting information regarding

first

the Sanscrit alphabet as

introduced into Corea, and explains the modifications

which the

letters,

both vowels and consonants, have undergone at the hands of the

difficulties

Buddhist priests to meet the

of writing with a Chinese pen or brush.

knowledge of these changes and the principles governing

their use, is essential to the

student in tracing the identity between Sanscrit proper, written across the page,

and Corean Sanscrit, wiitten down the page

writing,

in syllabary forms.

And

it

is

this

Sanscrit syllabary combination that supplies the key to the present system of Corean

whereby two or more

letters

one

vowel with one or two consonants

are

regularly grouped into one logotype.

As

regards the Corean alphabet, so far as the consonants are shown as having

been derived from the Sanscrit in the above table, there only remains one more
consonant calling for special attention and study.
Corea, the Sanscrit semi-vowel

When

originally introduced into

but reduced to the form 2^ for y was written printed books. The letter, however, was further modified for purposes of their cursive script into the four forms =i, JJ ^, and from these latter the Coreans drew their four letters possessing y as their initial sound, viz f: ^ j^,, 7f ya, ye, yo andy^w the
i:i',
, :

connecting link of identification being found in the current Corean script.

the perpendicular stroke of the Corean,
or top line of the Sanscrit writing, on
tJie

As regards

principle corresponds with the horizontal

to wl^ich the letters proper were respectively

attached.

The annexed table

the Corean alphabet
:

will

show the

series of

changes which the Sanscrit

letters

have undergone before their

final modification into the present letters representing

XYl

COREAN MANUAL.
Sanscrit Consonants

Modern Corean
as introduced

as used in the

XYth

Consonants

century A.D.
into

Corea

in the

IVth
as printed.
as written.

as written.

as printed.

Century AD.

7
11

A^

tr

^
^
^
W

m
P
s

^
yy

A
6

ng
cli

H
5^

X
^.
'7

h
t

INTRODUCTION.
As

xvii

regards vowels, the modificationa effected in the Sanscrit letters in different

first

Buddhist books since their

introduction in the fourth century, have been both

so that their identification has

numerous and complicated, so much

become practically

hopeless as regards the principles guiding their evolution and construction.

But
vowel
This

while the mere shape of the letters afibrds no information to the student, the clue to
their determination is supplied in the classification

and order of the

and

different

sounds, accompanied by their Corean transliteration and Chinese equivalents.

is

more especially apparent

for the

vowel sounds of the Sanscrit

Iri.

As taught
totally

to Coreans the Sanscrit vowels comprise a

medley of

dots, curves

and strokes

unlike their Sanscrit originals

whereas for purposes of writing in combination with

the consonants, the vowel letters were further reduced to one or two short dots and
curves.

Thus the vowel

appears regularly as a curved stroke somewhat like a half

bary.

with which it was combined and formed a syllaThe short vowel a was treated exactly as in the regular Sanscrit inherent and part of each consonant sound. But the two open Sanscrit vowels a and a were taught under the forms 5i and z^, which latter were again further reduced to
circle ( to the left of the consonant,

2^ and

2j^

for purposes of their current script in Sanscrit

and the right hand half of

these letters supply the key to the Corean

a,

which

in their vernacular running

hand

was generally written with the

distinctive dot or
less

dash towards the foot of the

letter.

Where, however, the a sound was

prolonged the Sanscrit vowels were reduced to

a mere appending hook, like a comma, placed to the right of the consonant, and this

was further reduced for Corean into the dot under the consonant for a short. The Sanscrit o was modified by the Corean Buddhist scholars into a series of short curves over each other but where combined with a consonant in syllabary form these
;

curves were connected so as to

latter form, together

make a

short

wavy

line

under the consonant, and this

vs^

with the abbreviated modification

used in the Sanscrit sound

om, transliterated pg in Chinese, supplies the key to the prototype of the Corean vowel JL (o), which in their cursive script approximates nearest to the modified Sanscrit
original.

These modifications of the Sanscrit vowels and the four derivatives from the
semi-vowel y, widely divergent as they are from their originals, fully illustrate and establish the principle which guided the Coreans in the selection and construction
of the letters to indicate the vowel sounds of their language. formation, reference

But

in tracing their

must always be had

w^ith their

to the

Corean cursive script as giving the

key to their identification

of the Corean letters in printed books

of the engraver and facilitate his

their

The sharp angular form was subsequently adopted to suit the exigencies labours in cutting the wooden blocks from which
Sanscrit originals.

books were printed

angles and squares under such conditions would naturally

present fewer difficulties than curves and circles.

Coreans, however, continue to

naturally lending itself

employ the cursive

to this

script

the Chinese pen, or rather brush,

offers

form which, as thus written,

a striking resemblance to the Sanscrit seen


xviii

COREAN MANUAL.
and charms obtainable
for

on

leaflets

a few cash per sheet by Buddhist devotees at

Corean temples.

While as regards vowels the identification between Corean and Sanscrit is far from easy, and in some measure neither complete nor satisfactory, for consonants on
the other hand, the process of gradual transformation from Sanscrit to the present Corean letters is both clear and self-evident. But the student, desirous of further
prosecuting his investigations on the subject of the Corean alphabet,
is

referred to

the Chen

En

Chip :^ "s

^ and other Buddhist works.

civilization

Four epochs mark the history of

I.

and

literature in

Corea

The introduction of Chinese writing by Ki Tzu 3^ -^ in 1122 B. C.

II.

The propagation of the Buddhist

religion

by missionaries (Chinese, Hindu

and Thibetan) from China in the fourth century A. D. III. The revival of letters during the if j^ Silla dynasty, 449-920 A. D. IV. The invention of the present Corean alphabet in 1447 A. D. As a race the Coreans claim an antiquity dating back some two thousand years B. C. Tradition and history concur in ascribing the valley of the head-waters
of the Sungari liiver as the
characteristics of type
features,

cradle

of their ancestors.

At present two separate

with well cut

mark

the people

the

Manchu,

tall of stature

and the Japanese

witli its distinctive individualities of build

and physiogover the

nomy

and these

characteristics are further borne out alike

by tradition and by the

scattered

history of the people.

Originally a congeries

of rude tribes

Corean peninsula, their land became the happy hunting ground of their northern
neighbours,

who impelled by

the pressure of population and the severity of climate

have, in obedience to a universal law of expansion, pushed their

way southwards

into

warmer regions and more genial surroundings. The aborigines driven from their homes by these invaders from the north made their way into Southern Japan across the narrow straits through the Tsushima Islands, which in early years belonged to Corean domination. Apart from racial identification of type between modern
Japanese and the ancient inhabitants of the Corean peninsula, Japanese have
likewise a tradition that their

own

original

home

lay to the west,

where the sun

sank to

rest in the ocean

and

their oldest historical

records declare that they

their

"descended from heaven in a boat"

across the Tsushima
Straits.

clearly proving

Western origin from

Besides, in support of this identity of origin there

stands out as a clear and distinct proof, that remarkable parallelism of grammatical
construction and syntax between the two languages as at present spoken, which can

only be explained by unity of race in prehistoric ages.

The aborigines of Japan

;

Aiuos
latter

impressed their vocabulary on the immigrants from the peninsula

but these

were unable to abandon the grammatical construction of their sentences, which

remains to emphasize the language as Corean in syntax with an Aino vocabulary.

INTRODUCTION.
Between the two countries the early history of

xix

art and literature had always been Corea imports and borrows from China, passing on her new civilization and literature to Japan, where the pupil more apt than the master and

intimately associated.

located in

more favourable surroundings, has long outstripped Corea

first

in the

march

of progress.

Out of the mists of antiquity and legend, the

literature

acknowledged date in

connection with the Corean race occurs in B. C. 1122 with the introduction of Chinese

and

civilization

by Ki Tzu

^ ^.

Yet

it

is

clear that even at that early

period the Coreans were in possession of

many
all

elements of culture and society.

study of the native vernacular, eliminating

Chinese terms, proves the existence

of a people early acquainted with the manufacture of iron and copper, but ignorant of
silver

and gold

charcoal alone being employed in their reduction of these two metals,

for coal does not

appear among the products of the country until very recent years.

Their dwellings, as evidenced from their vocabulary, were originally merely

low

mud

huts or burrows in the ground

style of housing

which has come down

all over the country.

to the present time

and

is still

found among the poorer classes

The erection of proper dwellings and the system of heating

underground
flues

their abodes

by means of

were arts borrowed from Chinese

and

this is further seen in the

use and meaning assigned to the word

pan^

'\^,

derived from the Chinese

^, meaning

originally room, but in Corean vernacular conveying

an idea always associated with

the heating of the floor of the room.

As

regards their numerals, one of the most important points in philology in

respect to primitive races, Coreans are especially interesting.

Only from

to 99

do

they possess numerals which are unquestionably Corean in their origin.

This limit

up

to 99

shows that their ideas and notions of property could not have been large-

primitive race with few requirements.

But as the people advanced with the spread

of civilization from contact with China, the Chinese numerals were imported to

supply the deficiences of the native vocabulary.

And

the identity of sound with

their pronunciation

which the numerals from

in Cantonese,

to 10, etc., are read as

I

compared with

where

as a final replaces the

of the Corean, proves their early

introduction into the latter language.

As

for the

fauna of the country, alongside of the Chinese names there are

also in current use native Corean

words designating most animals, both domestic

and wild. In agriculture the people must early have made great advances, and rice and grain of various kinds were always known to them as also, of course, native
implements of agriculture.
Possessed of a limited vocabulary suited to the requirements of a simple
primitive tribe, Coreans drew on Chinese for

new names and

ideas necessary in their

progress to a higher civilization.

But

all

the peculiarities of Corean construction,

;

idiomatic and grammatical, have remained unchanged

and in many words these

Chinese terms have become so incorporated and assimilated into the language that

XX

COREAN MANUAL.

only a knowledge of Cantonese and the principles regulating Corean euphony can
detect

and trace

their

Chinese derivative.

In the
clear

compilation of the 17th century,

we have a

1^ Ok P'yen^ a Corean and concise dictionary giving the

all

Corean transliteration (with the meanings in Chinese) of

in the

Chinese words occurring

Corean language.
in this dictionary

A
and

careful study of these Corean initials

their

and

finals as laid

down
this

comparison with the sounds as used in various

dialects of China, especially Cantonese,

may

well warrant the scholar in accepting

Corean transliteration as the nearest approach to the true pronunciation of the

ancient language of China

proving the great antiquity of the people and

their early

submission to Chinese civilization and influence.

INTRODUCTION.

XXI

SPECIMENS OF COREAN WRITING.

(a)

The square printed form.

51

A>
^]

-f

S
A

I
>2

^ ^
:!:

^ -? S ^ *l ^ ^ 4 -&
'S
(6)

The cursive

script ordinarily

employed

in letters

and cheap

editions of

Corean novels.

COREAN MANUAL.
ALPHABET.
mllE
Carean Alphabet consists of twenty-five different letters, comprising eleven vowels and fourteen consonants. Three of the latter, however,
as

possess a double si^ification and use depending on their position in the word
or syllable
;

an

initial,

is

the

mute

(or

pro-consonant) preceding an open

vowel sound, but as a

final is

always read ng\ cL as an initial has the somid

l;

of r or n, but as a final that of

and>^

as an initial

s,

but when final

t.

succeeding letter from

into syllables,

Coreans do not employ their Alphabet as in European languages, letter left to right in horizontal lines; they group the words

top corner.

and write in perpendicular columns commencing from the right hand Each word is broken up into its component syllables consisting
consonant, either
initial

of at least one vowel or diphthong with one

or

final;

and never more than three consonants and one vowel or diphthong can bo grouped into one syllable. Thus in kakera, go, we have the word broken up
into three syllables ka-ke-ra

p\
:

74 ^JL
ka and

07iera,

come, into

o-?ie-ra

JJ^

yA

^
us.

care being always taken so to

divide the syllables, as to be indicative

o respectively in the

of the

base or root of the word, viz

words before

tliere is

No vowel can stand unsupported by an initial consonant; and, where no vocalized or pronounced consonant somid, the letter ^ is prefixed, being always in this position mute, with a force and usage similar to the cipher
zero
as
(o)

in English.

Hence

the

-y

corresponds to the spiritus asper, so

indicating an

name "pro-consonant;" assigned to it. Just O may very properly be called the
initial

spiritus lenis,

open

vowel

sound,

these two breathings

having their correlation in Corean significantly marked by

letters representing their
initials

the

forms of the
can stand as

sounds.

All

the

fourteen consonants

preceding the vowel or diphthong of the syllable, but only seven single


2
' '

COEEAN MANUAL.
^'

consonants,
consonants,

A:,

2ZA;,

''^

^'^'

^^'

^
/p,

^'^' "^

i^

^^^^ >*

^'

^^^^ *^^^'

double

"^1

-jj

Im and

^^

can be used as
a,
is

finals.

In conjunction with the vowels

6 1-

6h

ya,

64

e,

OT

?/e

and

^1

i,

the

initial

consonant or pro-consonant

written prefixed to the

Jrt

left of

the vowel, but with

it

6^

o,

^^

yo,

-$- on,

you,

6^

eu

and

a,

is

always placed directly above them.

in every case directly
0!^,

The

final

consonant or
pal, foot,

consonants
talk, fowl.

come

under the vowel:

^
or

In ^.^

clothes, the letter

is

the

mute

pro-consonant always pre-

fixed to the vowel proper

in the

absence of a regular pronounced consonant

sound, and used merely for symmetry in writing.

As known and taught among Coreans,

syllabary,

their

alphabet

is

pure

and the term en moun 6^

-|-

%^~^

includes both vowels and con-

sonants, and

means "vernacular
i.e.

literature" in contradistinction to

chinsye^^

/A

^^

"true script,"

the Chinese written character.

CONSONANTS.
The Consonants may be
1.

classified

thus
...

Four sharp checks,

Jc,

')i 2^,

"C

(final

and

c//-,

2.

Four

aspirated checks,

...

^
-^
y^

k',

32. i^',

-^

i'

and

jt, cJi\

3.

Fourreduplicated checks,

...

kk,lSid

pp,'^'^

tt

smdZ^

chch.

4.
5.

Three nasals,
Spiritus lenis,

...

n,

xi

and

final

ng,

...

silent initial, or

pro-con son ai;t.

6.

Spiritus asper,

...

'ST h, aspirate.

7.

One

sibilant,

...

^A

initial

s.

with
8.

its

reduplication

...

J^
-^
I

ss.

One

trill,

...

final,

and

r or

initial.

PEOXUXCIATIO^' OF COXSONANTR.

ASPIBATED CHECKS.
The
value of the breathing in the four aspira,ted checks
is

exactly

^hat of the sp'uitus asper uttered with a strong out-breathing, and always after

th3 consonant.

Complete contact takes place

In Corean there

in

pronouncing the consonant the

;

breath
is

is

gathered and allowed to explode audibly and forcibly, directlj'this contact

is

withdrawn.

no modifying or softening of the sharp checks in

SjS

conjunction with the aspirate sound, such

in hath or
hatlic.

ph

into f in philosophy, or th as seen

In Corean each sound

is

clear

and

distinct, first the

check
placed

and then the

aspirate.

In transliterating these
original,

letters I

have therefore adhered

to the analogy of the

Corean

where the

diacritical
t'

mark

is

over the ordinary check, and used the forms

th and chh, in

A*',^',

and ch\ instead of kh, ph

language.

which

last the

presence of h might suggest the modification

of the cliecks with the softened sounds, ph, th, etc, of the English

Again, as the aspirate sound invariably follows the consonant, the forms hk, hp,ht and hch are inaccurate and misleading, and therefore inadmissible.

REDUPLICATED CHECKS AND SIBILANT.

Besides these ordinary and aspirated forms, the four checks,
ch, are frequently

strong an

and pronouncsd by Coreans at the beginning of a syllable with so emphasis that four new and allied sounds are evolved which may
k,

p,

very properly be termed "reduplicated" cheoks.

will

And

the

name

''reduplicated''

serve

to

indicate the

manner

in

which they are written as well as pro-

nounced.

It appears that the Coreans, instead of inventing letters to represent

these sounds,

have with great discrimination and accuracy taken the ordinary

the sound was to be intensified, re"C.

check as the basis, and, to indicate that

duplicated the initial consonant
'J
^

and

^
it

as necessary.

In -3*
but by
it

kcnn,

catty,

we have
initial

the regular sound of the ordinary check,

k,

emphasizing the

consonant, gathering the breath, and dwelling on

with

considerable pressure so that the vowel

lost,

sound following

is

ignored and almost

we produce the reduplicated sliarp check 77 Similarly \d ptje, paddy, and tiBJ ppye, bones;

kk, as in

^^^kkeun,

string.
ttkl,

tkl,

moon, and

daughter;

^L Cl

cliata, I sleep,

and

^L

XX-

clicliata, I plait.

The

sibilaiit s is

likewise found reduplicated, the sound being intensi-

fied bv pressing the tongue against the roof of the mouth, gathering the breath, and then forcibly and sharply ejecting it with a strong hissing noise. Compare

J\. Ciordmary

sata, I

buy, with

^\,

"Ci- ssata,

I build;

in

the

first

we have
is

the

sibilant as in English, but in the

all

second the enunciation

sliortened^

sharpened and intensified, initial consonant sound.

emphasis and

accent being concentrated on the

COREAN MANUAL.
Instead
generally employ
to indicate the
of

reduplicating
as

the
to

consonant
the
in a
left

in
"]!

writing,

tlie

Coreans

a prefix
;

of

and

^
serves

reduplicated sound

and

few books an
ioin
slot,

initial

the

same purpose.

The name 5|
and

/A

-Sr

which the

Ccreans

assign to this reduplication of the four checks and the sibilant, defines clearly the nature
of the spelling

the character of the pronunciation,

toin being

the adjective participle of

the

"w*

toita, thick,

and referring to the thickening cf

or sibilant,

ordinary

current
the

pronunciation of

the initial check

while

^1

i.

siot is

name by which

the letter

is

known

to Coreans.

As regards the vowel

consonant,
its

or diphthong immediately following the reduplicatad

All breath, accent

quantity

is

naturally shortened.

and emphasis

are thrown on the initial consonant sound, and the vocal organs have neither

time nor opportunity to dwell on the vowel.

TBILLS.
The two
trills

and
an

are represented in Corean

by the
final

letter
I

with the sound of

as

initial

and

as

final.

This

2. does not
it is

>

correspond exactly to the English pronunciation of that letter; in Corean

more softened
nunciation of
is

or trilled, as

may

be observed from a careful study of the promoul, water,

etc.

-^
in

poul,

fire,

-^

As an
I

initial this letter

read n in words of Chinese derivation which possess

as the initial in their

original.

But

many words now

Z

assimilated into the language from Chinese,

Coreans ignore the

of the radix sound

is

and employ
I
consiilt,

V*

in
is

their transliteration.

Thus

Jt^

eui-non

from

^^

and

always written thus,

instead of

$A

j.

eui-ron, although this latter

sound

is

one which the Corean

vocal organs are quite capable of pronouncing.

EUPHONIC CHANGES.
Of the seven consonants employed as finals to close a word or sylundergo certain modifications to meet the requirements of Corean euphony, the guiding principle being ease and freedom in pronmiciation.
lable, five
1.

Final Final Final Final

becomes ng before

7/i

or

V^

71.

2.

m
71

approximates to the sound of ng hcioie^k.

3.

W
^

becomes becomes

when

followed by

S
or

4.

2^

before

1*^

n.

PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS.
5.

Final -Am

(i)

resumes

its

normal

somid before another,>t

s.

(ii)

becomes n before

or

n.

And

of the initial consonants the three following are subject to various

euphonic changes in Corean pronunciation:

1.

Initial

U n

(i)

becomes
is

when preceded by

^
most only
^jci.

(ii)

practically mute, or retains at

I
i,

a faint nasal sound, before the vowel sounds

ye^

;^|

2.

Initial -J"

h may be heard
\
i
,

pronounced as a
yei

faint

sh sound

before the vowel

sounds

ye,

and

^
its

tjou.

3.

Initial

is

constantly modified from

true sound as

trill

into a faint nasal n, in

words derived from Chinese.

Thus

|f^7j^

is

correctly transliterated in Corean

^
I

^
(as
is

rding-sijou,

meaning

cold water in the sense of drinking water, but- is

initial r

pronounced nding-sou.

The

passes into a distinct n, while the y in syoit

of

we

shall
for

see later)

merely prolongs the sound

transliteration,

the

on.

The

rule

that,

purposes of
initial letter

H.

is

retained to

mark the

original

sound of the

of the radix; but in pronunciation it shades off into a faint

or ng, at times

even disappearing entirely as an

initial

consonant sound, especially before the

vowel sounds
that in

^,

ji

ye and

^j

yei.

This

may

be explained from the fact

many words
is

purely

Corean in their

origin,

an

initial

before these

three vowels

subject to a process of modification and elision

the

indolent
to
their

habits so characteristic of the people as

a race naturally

extending

manner

of speech.

Where, however, the word derived from the

thoroughly assimilated
into

Chinese has
the

become
all

the

language,

so

that to

native scholar

trace or knowledge of its derivative root has really disappeared, the consonant

is

regularly resorted
V|.
"jl

to,

both in writing and in pronunciation.

Thus the

common term

nan-ri, (pronounced nalli)

,

meaning war, comes from the

Chinese roots ^l (disorder)

and

S^

(separation) the former of which, however,

,

when used by

itself

and written

singly, is very correctly transliterated

ran in

native Dictionaries.

COEEAN MANUAL.

We

thus arrive at the following complete

TABLE OF CONSONANTAL SOUNDS.

(1)

k as

in Jceel:

Tj^kat, hat;

yjrkak, each.
(2)

when

the k passes into a sonant

py
>y

X\kanta
kil

ganta,

I go;

gil,

road;

^fl kaigai, dog.

(3)

ng

(final)

when

followed by

or 1>-

n
water

^ "?
^
y; kk
ox g:

^^^ ^^^^

13

^^^^ wow/, medicinal neki, ^1 ^^^ neki

ne7ig

sufficiently.

-^ kkoulgoul,
TSSLkkot

honey

got, flower;

k,

The hard

A-

sound followed by a strong

aspirate:

^
^
(1)

k'o,

nose;
knife.

'^k'a7,

as in paper:

y
^1

pap, food;
pdi, boat,

(2)

W2-

(final)

when

followed by

O
I

m or V- w

H
Ti^
or
b:

n
C^

-^^^ w<5^'^
c/top worn

pam mekta, I eat food

idler.

v^ *a
i?i?

cham nom,

^B)|

^;>aitebaita, I extract;
PP^^^^

^rT
3Li?>' the sharp

balli, quickly.

p sound

followed by a strong aspirate:

S^p'al, arm;

PJ'ijW^a, I

sell;

M'p'oimg, wind.

PRONUXCIATION OF COXSOXANTS.
1^
(1)
t

as in top, used as an initial only

J^ ton,
(2)

money
leg.
is

tX- V\ ^ri,
ch as in church.

This sound
t^'

found in the two purely Corean words

paper;
;

-^

tyoheui

chyoheui,

O
and
also in

x\ tyot'a chyot'a,
of

good

words

Chinese origin
i i,

when

this

consonant

is

followed

by the vowel sounds

ye,

A\ yei or ^M'Jjo:
;

XA

W
^1

chikyeng, territory ^J XX-tyemch'ita chyemch'ita, ^ tyeichdchyeicha, disciple

tilyeng

I di^ane;

^
tc.
ti

-^

tyomoTi

^^

<-^'y

^^
X^

^
ttdm

"CX-ttarita

chyomok,
sweat.

section.

darita, I beat;

dam,
saw;

(1)

t',

the sharp

sound followed by a strong

aspirate, but never modified

into the sonant th as in bathe:

Jgi^'q/}, a

,^^Veum,
(2)

a crack.

ch',

when preceding

the

vowel

sounds

/,

ye and
its

:^|

yei

\n
ti

a
:

few words derived from the Chinese, after the manner of

prototype

^
p^

-i

-g- X^i'iA:otik;iatoch'ikoukhata, I govern;

Xtf^/enc/jya??^ ch'yenchyang, ceiling;

^1

^ fyeimyen
a load;

ch'yeimyen,

self respect.

^ch

as in

church:

^chivi,

^
:^chch
or j:

VX-choukta, I

die.

XX-cJichyottaiyotta, I drive away;

taste salt.

^l tl chchatayattii'y

; ;

COEEAN MANUAL.
3t
c/i',

the sound of ch followed by a strong aspirate:

J^

ch'i))i,

lance;

J^ch'ong, gun;

J^ XX
X^
(1)

chHpta, cold.

as in

name:

Vf. ^^nara,) kingdom;

-^
(2)
I

XX-nopta, high.

when preceded

or followed

by g.

\M ^^pyelno pyello,
>|J-

especially;

^palnopallo,

with the foot;

,war.

Vt
(3)

nanri

nalli,

mute
;^|

generally as an initial before the vowel sounds

yei,

i,

"i

ye

and

sometimes shading into a

faint nasal

or ng:

H
V^l

XX-nihta

ikta, ripe;

'^

nyeichyek or ngyeichyek

yeichek, ancient times

\A

nyeram

yeram,
i,

summer;

vl ni
X3
(1)

or ngi

tooth.

as in

man J9L mom,

:

the body

-^
(2)

moul, water.

ng

(final)

when

followed by

y k:

/A y\

XX-syemkita

syengkita,

I serve;

yV
6
(1)

^
^

A;amA;ewikangkeui, cold in the head.

initial,

spiritus lenis, or

always prefixed to vowels in the absence hence termed the "pro-consonant" of a vocalised consonant, and

mute

CV ^1 ;%!
<d
$

apachi, father

yenkeui, smoke;
I cry

t^ oulta,

^jjo,

bedding.

rKONUNCiATION OF CONSONANTS.
(2)

ng

at the close of a syllable:

^Vpang,

room;

yj' kang, river;

^^L J3L sonnkof, awl.

(1) h,

spiritus asper,

etc,

always separate and distinct, as in and never coalescing with a consonant:

pakhoi, a wheel;

inh-liorn, short-hand,

3.^
^^^

kyetheui, beside;
Jwuei, after;

^1

-gl. "C^

ha k tang, school.

(2)

faint initial sh before the

vowel sounds
strength;

H, ^

Z/^.

^I

yei

and

-y| t/ow

'gl /m?t 'gj

"ct!
^?/e

shim,

I^
>>^
(1)
s

shye, the tongue; hyeim shyeim, number; v^ hyoungnyen shyoungnyen,

spade

year

of

famine.

when

initial,

as in sun:
S(X2?,

>y*
>^\.

sardm, ^ a
J'g.

man;

>^r
(2)
t

sakton, wages.

when

final,

as in hit:

Tj

ket,

thing
field;

^pat,
,5L
''^'^ot,

nail.

In this
()

latter position
its

however

it

is

subject to

two euphonic changes

s:

resuming

normal

sound when followed by another^

y\

^^katsdro

J2. .j^

y^

kassaro, with a hat; motsseulketmosseulket, useless

thing.

10

COREAN MANUAL.
(Z>)

passing into an n sound

when

followed by x2

^'^

or v-* n:

^
31

T ^T '^^^otmekta monmekta,
l"

I cannot eat;

^tP^^^^^^^*

pinnata,
;

brilliant.

>^

ss

or

^:

^t
-^M

^O^sseuta

W- ssi^ifa
61
'Ci'

-^

zeuta, I use; I wash ssoita

zitta,
_p
:

zoita, strike

upon.

(1)

Zas in call or milk,

when
or
"^

closing a syllable either singly or in conjunction

with

k,

n m,
^nal,

day;

Mj'paZ, foot
3*1

XX'mdlMa,
X^salmta,

clear;
I boil;

-^

.>^ V\-syelpta, I grieve.

(2)

r as in carry,

when between two

'^JLniara, don't
'

vowels, or a vowel and the aspirate

'

"
^
I

Vl naranim, king
I speak.

'

"^ Cl marhdta,

(3)

(initial)

in

words derived from the Chinese,

in

which a

distinct

sound appears in the roots:

H.

^^^^^

pronounced ndiil coming day, pronounced noin old man.

i.e.

to-morrow

^
S\
(4)

^f

loin

^
*"

loisyeng,

pronounced noisyeng, thunder.

sound before the vowel sounds

almost mute
I
i,

initial

with a faint nasal

in

ye and ^| yei,
"t51

words derived from the Chinese

i,

profit;

T^

^
V

^jHrryengsakoan
ryeimo

yengsakoan,
manners.

consulate;

wj

yeimo,


PEONUNCIATION OF VOWELS.
11

VOWELS.
The Corean Alphabet
Ol.
6|:
a

contains eleven vowels

^
^
(6,

^6^

en

ya
e

yo

6\
(u)

or u)

J2-

ou

ii

(short)

^
other
missionaries in

ye

(yo, or yii)

^
to

you

(yu)

PBONUNCIATION AND TBANSLITEBATION.

In transliterating these vowels I have deemed
considerations,
their
to
it

advisable, apart

from

adhere

the

system introduced

Dictionnaire Goreen-Fran(;ais

by the French and Grammaire Corccnfie,

two monuments of painstaking accuracy and erudition.

No
The
the
letter o

doubt to the employment of the

letter

to

represent the vowel

sound tA some exception

may

legitimately

be taken by an English student.

supplemented by a

series of diacritical

marks might

at first sight

appear more appropriate.

associated with diacritical
ies

But when we come

this

to a careful consideration of

diphthong combinations derived from

vowel, the use of the letter o

difficult-

marks

will be

found attended with greater

letter
e.

than the employment of the single

e,

Certainly experience proves

that the forms

ye, ei

and yei
oi,

will be

much

less

perplexing to

the

student,

and

will help to

convey a clearer idea of the pronunciation of their sounds,

ydi, etc.

than can ever be done by

in their transliteration

In these diphthongs

ei
e,

the value of the use of the English

and yei exhibit and correspond

no single
phonetic

very

much with

ei in eight

and ye in yea. For the vowel CA

itself,

letter can, for

purposes of transliteration, properly define or determine

its

value.
in

The somid varies in different words, even in those of the same spelling Corean. As a general rule it approaches nearest to the "neutral" vowel in
sir,

err, verge,

bird,

absurd, ranging from 6 short

is

in

closed

syllables

to

il

short

in

words

where the vowel sound

least objectionable

somewhat more prolonged.

The

letters e

and ye then are only

to be accepted as symbols for the

Corean vowels

64 and (d

the

under the circumstances,

and especially

as obviating elaborate diacritical marks.

At the same time the simplicity and

early

regularity of the Corean alphabet

will

enable the

student, to dispense

with

all

adventitious aids derived from any system of symbols which, however

of
transliteration,

carefully selected for purposes

can at best only give

an

approximation to the vowel sound.


12

COREAN MANUAL.
The vowels 6| _y^ and J2are
clear,

open and
a,

distinct, o

and in sound

are fairly represented by

soft

their

English equivalents

and on, in father,

analogy of a

and

uncoutlt, while in quantity they are found

pronounced either long or

follovved

short; occasionally they are so prolonged that, judging from the

few words,

it

would seem that they must have been

by the vowel

^
long

eu,

and

that this

must have been gradually dropped in writing

an

abbreviitself.

ation to which the Corean' script,

down

the page, would naturally

lend

The vowel ^| has likewise a long and short sound ranging

i

from the

in ravine to the sliortened vocalization in pin, kin

i

but

it

never possesses

the broad sound of

in light,

life,

etc.
its

In

6 we
is

have normally the French sound eu reproduced and in

is

diphthong combinations this phonetic

this

especially apparent

but
t

occasionally
in jwf?/.

vowel

modified so as to approximate to the sound of

vov/el

or ^

The
pronunciation

is

known

to Coreans as

ar&i a or lower a in contraa, or

distinction to the regular open a sound,

its

which they term ouei

upper a; in

sound

may behest

defined as the sound of d short, but

more

quickly enunciated and occasionally merging into the sound of

in participles

eu,

especially

and in the Oppositive Case.

In the four forms 6i; ra

^^ and
o

-S* we have a series of compound

or double vowels constantly occurring in Corean, and consisting of a ^ sound

prefixed to the simple vowels a,
e,

and

ou, viz

ya, as in the
as in

yard; ye, as in yeoman; yo, as in yore; and you,

youth.

Enghsh word But in many

Corean words, and especially after an initial >u or the effect of this y sound is merely to lengthen the pronunciation of its radix vowel, with which it
coalesces so as practically to disappear,
will

knowledge

of this use

and practice
in

greatly assist the student to a correct pronunciation of

many words

Corean:

(how many)

is

B]}elt

niyet, but read met, as in the English met; in

-^v^
much

(the native

name
e,

for the

kingdom

of Corea), th y merely lengthens

the vowel sounds o and

as
in

which are then read with a value and quantity

English

Chosen.

The name

for

the

capital

of the 'country

>^ ^^has

given rise to constant vagaries, both in pronunciation and in

transliteration.

The Corean

spelling is

dissyllabic, >A^ sye,

read
'

sc,

where
sir,

has the sound of the " neutral " vowel,

or

tir

vocal, heard in

err,

etc.,

and

^^ Old,

where ou has the English u sound heard in youth, pronounced,

however, with a shorter accent, and nearer the u in pull than the corresponding sound inpool. There is, however, a constant tendency on the part of students to elision, reducing the sound to one syllable, with the pronunciation of Syoul

(rhyming with

school), a

word ^g" which

ni

Corean means ivmc.

PRONUNCIATION OF YOVrELS.

13

TABLE OF VOWEL SOUNDS.

6l a as
in father:

^hmal, language;
"^|- niat, taste.

C>U{1)

2/a a.s in

yard: ^^yak, medicine;

^^7iyang 100
(2)

casli.

when preceded by -A
lengthened a sound
:

or^

,tlie

is

almost dropped, leaving merely a

^h

"Si syang-hdi

sang-hai,

always;
I say farewell.

.^ \M
6-| e as in

"o

"Ct- c/z^/nrZ^T/eZ/iafo chakpyelhata,

herd (neutral vowel), with a sound ranging from d short to u short

and a pronunciation that varies even in words of the same spelling:

^ ^
Cn
XA

dntok, a slope; hut (A cpta opta, I carry; but 61 I cover; but X^ XX-tepta
enfek
^Cl-

.^jmeroun

t(;pta

uroun, elder; 'CX'Cpta I have not X^ tupta, warm.

iipta,
tepto.

OT

[1)

ycdu^ in

yeoman: ra

^
ro

yere, several;

OT
(2)

^JA yekeui, here.

when preceded
e

by^

-^

,the y

is

almdst dropped, leaving a lengthened

(neutral vowel) sound:

^u ^u ^i >M chyetchet,
(3)

^y^P^y^P^^^^
milk.
oi'

sepsephata,
is

am

sorry

occasionally,

when preceded by xJ

>

the y

almost dropped, and

leaves the long e sound of get in English:

tH myet

met,

how many;

rf PyeV^, paddy.

as in soft, with the regular sound of o in English, varying

of or

between the

and

ore

J?

y^^ moto, altogether

dale.

/X. J3- sankol, a

14

COEEAN MANUAL.
(1)

^^

yo as in yore

^B- yok, abuse

^_
(2)

'^yora7i, tumult.
or

when preceded by>^

long

>^

'the

?/

is

almost dropped, leaving merely a

sound :>^ --^ syomoun

somoun,
to

rumour;
narrow.

^^- XX-chyopta
.^^oiL as in imcouih, approximating

chopta,
:

more

the

?t

sound in ^9wZZ, than the oo

sound in

2^ool --j^
:

moun, a door
poul,
fire.

^
But
at times this

sound

is

distinctly prolonged:

Compare -if"

noun

noon,

snow, with
nurse;

nonn, the eye.

^(1)

you asiu youth:

J^ ^youmo,
-tT

yountal, intercalary month.

,

(2)

when preceded
a long ou sound:

by^or j^

the y

is

almost dropped, leaving merely

syoid

soul,

wine;

^;^ 6 1
6^
(1)

cJujo2iin

choiiin, landlord.

cu as in the French pen

>-3L keu, that

v^ -^
(2) i

seumoul, twenty.

or y, as in pity:

-^ >w m-

Jceuvisyepang

kimsyepang,
to
i

Mr.

Kim

^^
^I
i

xX-seuWa
i

silt'a,

I refuse.

with a sound varying from

short in pin, chin, etc.

long in ravine

Compare y^
^il

^ ^
r/idl,

"Cl- 7i-i;Jiato,

important, with

^
:

'C\- h'dta, lo:]g;

^\-p7hata, I compare, with ^jl

P^^j7to, s:lk.

a as in

tajj,

with the sound of a distinctly shortened

Compare

a horse, with. '^J' mal,

/.7.ac7if.

speech;
hachi, a branch.

nr^ ;^j

until,

with

^L ^|

;:

15

PEONUNCIATION OF DIPHTHONGS.

DIPHTHONGS.
In order to meet the vocal sounds which their alphabet so
to express,
far

failed

the

Coreans very aptly availed themselves of certain diphthong

combinations and thereby evolved twelve distinct forms and sounds:

^Ijai

5]oi

^^^
$fl oai

$1
6^1

ai

41
^1
S]

oui

ei

youi
eui

4]
t)]

oue
ouei

(A] yei

PBONUNCIATION AND TBANSLITEBATION.

Cm
>^l
'*)

ai.
aj.
'

In enunciation, these two diphthongs are practically

vocalization of ai in said (sed); the difference
is

identical,

while

in sound they range from the open ai in maiii (mane), to the shorter

generally regulated by

the accent or emphasis wdth which they are pronounced:

Compare C

^|

taisin, minister,

with

t^j

y^j tUsin, on behalf

of;

/M
^1
ei.

sairo,

newly,

with

T^l

^
seit,

tUro,

according

to.

This diphthong has the sound of the English

but at times
is

in get, met, etc.,

ei in eight
i

found prolonged, so as to correspond with the

chycnei, before, with Ai^
three.

Compare j^ 6^1

^1

yd.

In this diphthong we have the y somid prefixed to 6^1

ei,

as in yes, yea.

^1

^Cl- yeijyihsita, I

prepare.

oi.

(1)

As a general

rule, in closed syllables this

diphthong approximates

closely to the English oi in soil

*
.

^
4^1

>A| C4- moisita,^ I serve.

it

(2)

but in open monosyllables

sc'i

resembles the

German

modified o:

so, iron

.^^ 'j/joi cbo, crime

^ poi
often the latter sound.

po, linen

"^ XX-l become, may

be read either

toita or t'ota,

but has more

; ;

16

COKEAN MANUAL.
ouL
(1)

^1

This diphthong, in an open syllable and not preceded by a

is

consonant,

fairly

represented both

in

sound and spelling by

the

French

oui, or English we:

^*
(2)

rt

^"^^'''^

weoni,

dignit}'

but

when preceded by
i

a consonant,

tiie

sound

of

the

two
tlie

vowels -^'yj* and 6j

further coalesces and approximates nearly to

German

ii:

^1
(3)

tout

til,

behind;
initial j),

in

many

words, especially after an

i

the vowel sound on

:

disappears, leaving only a long

somid as in the English fatigue

^I poui pi,

broom
empty room.

^I Wrpouinpang pin pang,

TfJ
youi.

This diphthong, which appears only in a few words from Chinese and all commencing with the aspirated check

all

derived

^ has the

sound* of oui with y prefixed: but, instead of being clearly pronounced, the y has merely the effect of prolonging the quantity of the original oui:

^1

-5* C|- ch' yoidhdfa

chouihata, I am

drunk.
as the

eui.

This sound

is

one of considerable
distinctly coalesce,
syllables
ii,

difficulty to explain, for,

two vowels do not In open properregular sound of

it

cannot be regarded as a diphthong

it

may

be defined as a short u

not

like

the English
tl

w joined

with

the
i.

to the

vowel

But when preceded by a consonant, the

leaving only the vowel
like that of
i in
i

sound tends to disappear, to be clearly enunciated, with a sound much

wick

Compare $1

^ ewmw

iiisim,

doubt, with ;pl

in

-^ keuiho kiho,

flag%

oa.

The

value and quantity of the

oa here corresponds with the

vowel u, which, when joined to the open a (as in father), produces a sound represented by the English ua in quaff, or wa in waft:
I

$l'iri oa
a

iri

wa, come here:

^^ hoalhwal,
jU. ^^koapou

bow
a widow.

kwapou,

PEOXU^*ClAiiU-N

U-L

i^iPHTHONGS.

17

S^

oai.

In this diphthong, which rarely occurs in Ooreac words, we have

the vowel

^o

and the diphthong

6h

ai coalescing, so as to produce

the sound of the

Enghsh

icai in wait,

the

o ha^^ng

the

force

of

76

as in the case of the preceding diphthong:

wai, hoai
oai

Japanese;

hvrai, torch;

^
_^
Guc.

oaip'oung

waip'oung,
it

typhoon.
lo

The phonetic value

of the .S-^ou here is a

sound

vdl'ii

a quantity

somewhat more prolonged than the

or

ic

in.

the two previous cases,

while the (A sound corresponds tathe short

i^ronunciation of the English
.,

v.

As a general

rule, the

2f;o

in icon

may

be accepted as giving

*,.;,;

rendering of the sound of this diphthong:

^A
\L
rdji
,,;^,>/.

x3\"^'(-'n^-!^'inq

woumanfr.

discontent;

Here we have the vowel -2*0 and the diphthong 6^1 coalescing
so as to produce a

sound approaching to the English uc in quell or in

box;

icell

>^^| kouei,

^1
;^|

oiici,

why?;
slander.

^y hQueipa?ig,

:^

18

COREAN MANUAL.

IS0UN8.
SYSTEM OF DECLENSION.
The
system
of

chief feature

in

the

declension

of

Corean nouns
relation.
is

is

the regtlcir

agglutination

employed to express case

The noun-root
slightly

remains unchanged throughout the declension, or

at

most only

modified so as to meet the requirements of Corean principles of euphony, viz

ease in enunciation of consonants and harmonic affinity in vowel sounds.

Every Corean noun has normally,

different

in addition to the
of

root-form, nine

formal

agglutinations

expressive

case

relation.

But

it

should

be observed at the outset that,

vernacular writing, there
is

while these case endings appear regularly in

a

in conversation

constant

tendency to

dispense

with their use, in consequence of their somewhat cumbersome character.

is

This

especially

marked

in the case of the Nominative, the Genitive

and the Accusative,

stead

the root-form of the

Noun

being constantly employed in their

without

any

loss in perspicuity of

meaning.

the Locative and Ablative cases

and, though the noun-root

The terminations for the Instrumental are more regularly retained in Corean colloquial;
at

may

times be loosely employed in

the plr.ce of

the Dative, Coreans desiring to be accurately understood are careful to add one
of the case-endings or post-positions expressive of this case relation.

PABADIGM OF CASE SUFFIXES.

1.

Boot Form:

may be used

in

the place of almost any case, remaining

unchanged.
2.
3.

Nominative: (subject of sentence),

Instrumental: by, with,
for,

i,

si,

ch'i,
to,

ka or

hi.
etc.,

through,
heuro.

towards,

euro, no,

sixro,

chiiro, TO or
4.
5.

Genitive: of (possessive), eui, sni ov heui.

Dative:

to,

unto,

etc., eiiikei, saikei, heuikei,

or in the contracted forms

kei, kkei, kkeui.

6.
7.

Accusative: (object of sentence) euI, seid, clieid,

Vocative
:

reiil

or heul.

oh

a or ya.
ei,

8.
9.

Locative:

in, on, at, to, into etc.,

at,

sai or hei.
siiisj/c

Ablative: from, since,

as
for,

etc., eisye,

or

hcisije.

10. Oppositivc:

with reference
hciui.

to,

etc.,

cun, seun, cJieun, neiui

or

DECLEN8I0X OF NOUNS.
In
substituted

19

the

Accusative and

Oppositive

cases

dl,

an

etc.

are frequently-

and en appear to be a small dot being better adapted for speed in writing than eu, which is represented b j* a long horizontal stroke. In pronunciation, however, the sound of a in this position approximates more nearly to the sound of ew than to its strictly proper sound of d short.
for eul,
etc.

eun

The two vowel sounds

interchangeable in this position, the form of the Corean a

The eu of the Genitive eui and the Dative when preceded by an open vowel at the end of
a distinct

euikei

is

generally dropped
i

the

noun -root, the

being

furthur modified and coalescing with the final vowel of the root, so as to form

diphthong sound.

Thus

soichyet
is

is

regularly used for socui chyet,

cow's milk, and the Dative soeuikei

of oi in both instances being that of

also

contracted into soikci, the value

i

a pure diphthong, in which the o and

o in

coalesce and give a sound indistinguishable from

German.
dropped, leaving

In the Dative case, the eui of euikei

into kkei or kkeui for euphony.

is

frequently
is

only kei as the distinctive Dative ending, and this

generally further modified

Thus

malldvei
to horse

sirera

hanalnim kkeui
to

pilta

load

heaven
(I

I pray

(Load the horse.)

This
last

pray to heaven.)

form

is

generally used as an honorific, implying respect on

the part of the speaker.

ON THE FORM AND USE OF THE CASE SUFFIXES.

For words closed by a consonant the Nominative ends
in in
i,

which

is

some cases aspirated or modified into

si

or ch'i, so as to bring the case-

ending into euplionic accordance with the

final

consonant of the noun-root.

In nouns terminating with an open vowel, however, the Nominative appears in the form of ka, or hi where an aspirate is required.

For the Accusative case

Genitive,
eui',

eul

is

the

distinctive

ending, and for the

but both

these forms

are

subject to the various modifications

enumerated in the Paradigm of case

suffixes.

The nonnal form

of the

Dative case ending

is

eidkei.
,

Tliis

appears,

however, like the post-positions 61.

substituted for
is

^|

^ ^ and

"Oi

which arc frequently

It it, to be properly restricted to persons and animate objects. moreover frequently subject to modifications and contractions, as specified

in the

Paradigm above given.

20

COEEAN MANUAL.
The
Ijistnnnental case ends noimally in
ro,

but assumes the modified

iform of no, in accordance with principles of Corean euphony, when the case-ending
is

immediately precefled by an
.to
its -striclly

at the

end of the noun-root.

of

This case, in

addition

Instrumental sense

bv, ivith, etc., very frequently

bears a final sense, being used to express purpose for, and dirction through or

towards
ity.

ideas obviously consequent open or evolv&d from the idea

thus find
it

of instrumental-

We

constantly used with nouns of place and

e.g.

names of places

instead of; the locative ending,

6 _^
There
(1)

y\
are,

Pi-

is

equivalent to

"^

6^1

J7f ^l-I go home.

:

however, two proper forms expressive of local case-relation

ei,

the Locative agglutination

normally used where

rest

in or on or

direction towai'ds As implied;

(2)

the Ablative

agglutination
-.But^'at

eisye

normally used where direction from

has to ba expressed.

times these two forms appear to be. interchanged,

the sye of eisye being regarded as a merely enclitic particle added for the sake
of

euphony

especially in the case of

and Ahe Ablative form thus sometimes bears a purely locative sense, nouns denoting inanimate objects.
of the Vocative
is

The commonest form

this
filled

that
its

which ends in a; but

place

case

suffix

is

often

dispensed with entirely,

being frequently

by one

of the exclamatory interjections with

which the language abounds.

In addition to
culiar

these case-endings,

theCoreans possess a. form pe-

to their language, to

which has
in

been assigned the name of the Oppos-

itive c&se.

Ending normally

eun or an, this case has a meaning and use

precisely equivalent to the English prepositional phrase as for, .ivith reference

to etc.
it is sometimes and used as subject instead of the Nominative even added to the noun Its use is always to mark the* contradistinction of two opposing ideas case. oc propositions, and from this circumstance it has derived its name, of OpposIt is not restricted to nouns alone, for nearly every part of speech itive.

.It

occurs constantly in both colloquial and written Corean

root

where two ideas are contrasted as placed in opposition. use or meaning as a Corean word, Tha suffix but being chiefly employed with nouns the form has been included among the case endings for convenience of reference and explanation.

may

receive the suffix,

has no

independent

Similar case-ending.s are likewise found in the declension of the prois

nouns
after

only in the Genitive >...case eui

contracted into

for

sake of euphony
your, appearing

the open. vowel sounds of the root forms

VW my, andy^j
And

for instance, instead of

VL ^X

and vn ^\

a similar contraction also

in
fvict

occurs frequently in the Dative case.

point the rule already given for
vowel.

The pronouns

follow on this

nouns proper, where root form ends in an open

LECLEXSION OF NOUNS.

21

METHODS OF DENOTING NUMBEB, GENDER,

The Corean noun
teiil,

dc.

possesses no regular inflexion for

Number
all

the

suffix

which
of

is

occasionally utilized for this purpose, taking

the case termin-

ations

regular
for

noun

in

the

singular.

But

this teul is not properly

an

agglutination

the

plural; for

in Corean,

nouns must

be rendered

either

singular or plural according

to the context or

meaning

of the spealver as

may

be best gathered by the listener.

\\Taen teul
indefinite

is

affixed to a

noun,
Jidn

it

is chiefly

employed to indicate or express an

one

number.
;

Thus

sardm

oatta,

man came

tou

sardm

oatta,

two men came

but sardtn teul oatta,

men

came, imph'ing an indefinite number.

No

distinction
to

for

Gender

exists

in

Corean as an inflexional form.

When

sex has

be specially indicated, independent names are employed to

its sex,

designate the object and

the language, resort
is

or where such

names

or

had

to the

two prefixes

am

(female)

nouns are wanting in and sout (male) placed

immediately before the noun.

In Corean there are no Articles properly so-called.

pronouns are however employed

definite article in English
;

The demonstrative meaning and w^ith a use, corresponding to the and the Corean numeralhdn (one) used as an adjective,
the noun,

qualifying and prefixed to

may

legitimately be translated a or an

for our Enjjlish indefinite article.

N.B.

With
day

regard
all

to

the

following

declension tables,

it

should be

observed that, though

the case endings have for the sake of completeness been

given with each of the nouns, they are not by any

means
if

all

equally

used

thus

in

every

speech.

And

in

particular

it

should be noted that the

ever, used except

Dative ending in euikei appears strictly to be hardly, personal nouns.

with


22

COREAN MANUAL.

TABLE OF DECLENSIONS.
Nouns may be
(1)

declined as follows.
Eo-.;t

where the

ends in

k,

m,

w,

ng and

Boot


DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
(3)

23

When

the Eoot

ends in

(sometimes in p) by adding

si,

etc.

for certain

words, and cA'i etc. for others:

kat
kassi
hat.

Eoot
Nominative
Instrumental
Genitive

7> >;

the hat.

kassjiro

by the

ha^t.

kassai

of the hat.
to the hat.

Dative
Accusative

kassaikei

kasseul

the hat.

Vocative Locative
Ablative

kata
kassai

oh

the hat.

in the hat.

kassaisye

from the

hat.

Oppositive

kasseun

as for the hat.

J.

I-

Eoot
Nominative
Instrumental
Genitive

3^

pat
patch'i

field,

the

field,

patch' arc

by the

field,

patheui
patheuikei

of the field,

Dative
Accusative

to the field.

patheui
the
field.

patch' eul

J
oh
!

Vocative Locative
Ablative

pata
pathei

the

field,

in the field,

patheisye

from the
1

field.

Oppositive

patheun
patch 'eun

Sas for the

J

field.


24

COESAN MANUAL.
(4)

When

the
hi

root
etc.

ends in
for others
:

vowel, by adding

ka

etc.

for

certain words, and

Root

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

25

Exercise L
1.

-s

6.

7.

26

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

TI.

kapseul
price
I

have given

2.

5.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

27

Exercise

III.

pari foot

mopsi bad

apha
sore

My
2.

foot is exceedingly sore.

tari

apha
sore leg is sore

mot
not

leg

kao go

My

and

I can't go.

eumsik
food

massi
relish

epso has not

I have no appetite.
4.

^^i pamei
in night

^^1 nounr
snow
fell

^^
oatta

has come

Snow
5.

dm.'iug the night.

kang
river

moul

eresso

water has frozen The river has frozen.

6.

kil

kaki

eryepso

road

to go is difficult It is difdcult travelling.

7.

pika
rain
It

ol

tteut

hao

coming intention looks Hke rain.

makes

t
mal
horse

^3.
t'a-ko

7f

Pf

kakeitta

ride-and will go I will go on horse back.

28

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise TV.

nari

day

is

ch'ipta cold
is

poul
fire

ttaiyera

kindle

The weather

cold

light a fire.

ot clothes

elleun nipera quickly dress Dress yourself quickly.

pap
rice

kachye having taken Bring dinner,

onera

come

4.

^'d
sonnim
guest

t'^
hana one

^^
oasso

has come

guest has arrived.

^}%
saram

"vl^l
manhi

^^
onta

men
There are

many come several men coming.

pangei
in

teurye

nohara

room having entered put Put it into the room.

^^ ^ i^
kyokoun-koun
poulle
chair-coolies call Send for the chair-coolies.

mal
horse

chiouera saddle Saddle the pony.

saddle

anchang

PRONOUNS.

29

PRONOTJISS.
(1)

PERSONAL.

30

COREAN MANUAL.

Eoot


PEONOUNS.
31

(2)

DEMONSTBATIVE.
XA
chye

He,
that

she,

it,

they, that, (implying distance).

^
6|
model. Thus

keu
i

this

(impljdng nearness).
all

These demonstrative pronomis are

capable of declension on the usual

we

find

Eoot


32

COREAN MANUAL.
INTEBBOGATIVE.

(4)

nou

who
noukou
ena
etten

(oi persons)

which

whft ? what
(of ?

(of

persons and things)

persons and things)

which

(of

mousam
T3

what
what

persons and things)

61

mouet

(of things)

^
But
follows
:

\^
or

^ ^
-^ -^

and

^^

^
^

^^^ rarely,

if

ever, dechned.

-^

and

are capable of regular declension, as

Boot
Nominative

nou
noukou
noulca

who.

who.
noui

nouika
Instrumental
Genitive

nouiro

by whom,
of
to

noui
nouikei

whom, whom.

Dative
Accusative

noural

whom.
noukoural

-Ti- 1
Oppositive

I
as to

nouinan

whom.

\-

>-r

noukounan

PEONOUNS.

33

Eoot
Nominative
Instrumental

^5! -r

mouet
mouesi
mouello

what, what.

by what.

mouesaro
Accusa tive
Locative
Oppositive

a 6^4

mouesal mouesai

what,
in what.
as for what.

mouesan

(.5)

REFLEXIVE.

chakeui

che
himself, herself,
chei
itself,

oneself.

cheika
chyello
[himself, of himself,
itself,

seusaro

{i.e.

instinctively, of its

of itself, &c.,&c. own accord).

sero

one another, each other

pich'a

(reciprocal).

ch'inhi

soncho
sonsyou

-one

self,

himself, &c., &c.

{i.e.

in person).

34

PEONOUNS.

35

Note

1.

"Each" and ''Every" are frequently expressed by repeating the noun itself without any pronoun prefixed, thus: ta-tari for tal-tari
(monthly), na-nari for nal-nari (daily)
&c.
t'enchi

Note

2.

In

addition to the use o^ tenchi or

as

an

enclitic particle

to signify ever, the suffix

restrictive

na

is

frequently eraployed but with a

at
least",

more

sense,

meaning "any

"although", "no matter

what," "any whatever" &c.

Note

3.

The

indefinite

pronouns

sovie,

any,
of

somebody, anybody,
the
interrogatives

etc.,

are

constantly

rendered

by the use

p) and

^ >4
Who
Who

Thus

v*

j-r
F
'

will
tcill

^o
;

may mean

either

go ? or Someone will go

which
ma^

mean
act

either

man What

thus
sort

do
th**^?

of

men

act

or

tJiere

are

men

who

thv4

^^4
what
about to see

^
work

^^
is

may mean
work
to

either

What

toork is there to

be done ? or tJiere is

some

be

done.

And, in precisely the same way, the interrogativa adverbs

^/^I

when'fxA kow m<2ny?and 6^

indefinite sense of sometitnes

"C.|

tc^(?re? are frequently

used with the

or

by and by, several, and somewhere,

respectively.

(7)

BELATIVE.
Relative pronouns as such are

unknown
antecedent

in the Corean language,

but Relative clauses are rendered by means of

joined as an
Adjective to
the

Relative Participles,

Noun

present,

past

or

future, according to the nature of the time required in the Relative

clause.

36

COKEAN MANUAL.

Exercise V.

ourika

enchei

kakeisso
will go
?

we

when

When

will

we go

^ ^
neheui

*1

'^l etai

7f

V
go

>t

kanaiiya

you

where

Where
8.

ara you going ?

nanan
as for

ton

ep so

me
I

money have not

have no money.

as for

nenan you

pouchya
rich

toiyetta

have become
rich.

You have grown

^t ^4 ^^
nareul

me

ch'acha seek

oasso

have come
for

Are you looking

me ?

ouri

chipi

our

house

katkapso near
is

Our house

near.

cheika
oneself

chal well

mot
not

hayesso

have done

I beg to apologize.

6
keu
that
iri

nom
whose
fault is this?

t'assio

work

fault is

Whose
1

"cheika"

is

used for the sake of hicmility and means "I myself."

PEONOUNS.

37

Exercise VI.

noukoureul

whom For whom

2.

ch'asso seek

are you looking ?

t
han
one

^'

^-S^

nyang sik chouo nyang give each Give them a hundred cash each.

3.

kak
each

ch'yeei in place

ta
all

isso

are

There are some everywhere.

^
nal

f^ mata
each

^5J mouet
what

TJt
hao

day

make

"^^at do you do daily?

amo
any

pyel
special

il

work

is

epso not

I do nothing in particular.

v>re
:''Vtral

kachi kinds

ta
all

let

popsyeita us see
lot.

Let us examine the whole

nan-natch'i

one by one

chipe nip

tamera
fill

Take and pack them one by

one.

illo

hangsyang
continually
I

nyemnye
anxiety
this.

toio

by

this

become

am

always anxious about

10

38

COBEAN MANUAL.

Exercise YII.
1.

moulken
articles

nioto
all

ta
all

sa

oasso

buy

have come

Have you bought

the whole of the articles?

amotenchi

oasye

kachye
take

kakera

any whatever

having come
let

go
it

Whoever comes

him take

away.

etaitenchi

naika
I

wherever

ttarakanta follow
I will follow.

Wherever you go
4.

amo
any

iri-na

chosimhao
careful
careful.

work-ever

Whatever you do be

6
amo
any
kesi-na thing-ever
tteut
tairo

intention according
article

sseuo use

Use any

you

like.

-a
keu
that

41
saram

-i^
onan coming
I myself

T^i
kesal

4^1
ch'inhi

^5J-^
poasbo

man

thing

myself

saw

saw the man coming.

*>]
i

^J-l
chipeul

^.4
naika
I

^^
soncho
personally

^I5i<^
chiesso

this

house
I built

made

this

house myself.

end

saram-inchi

nailca I

what

man may-be
I

molla do not know

is.

cannot

tell

which

man

it

PEONOUKS.

39

Exercise VIIT.
(Belatives)
1.

6];^]
ecbei

3.^
ponaiii

4>tl
p'yenclii
letter

"l^
illie

^e^j,
paryesso
lost

yesterday

sent

Tlie letter I sent yesierday

2.

is

lost.

chikemu

meknaii
eating

now

yaK medicine

massi
taste

sseita
bit er

The medicine

that I

am now

taking tastes bitter.

ouri

sa-on

ch'dik

etai

innanya
are

we

buy-came

book

where

Where
4.

are the books that

we bought ?

ouri

we

kireisye mannatten eui ouen keu on the road met doctor that The Doctor we met on the road has arrived.

oasso

came

5.

na
I

marhan
said

ket thing

ta
all

toiyenna

have

become

Have you done what

6-

I told

you?

chye
that

mokoun
coolie

kachye taken

kal

chim
load
is

moukepta
is

going

heavy

That

is

a heavy load the coolie

going to take.

ouri

kenne-kal
across-about-to-go

we

mouri water

kipta

deep

The

river

we have

to cross is deep.

4^1
c,[v\

^ 1 luoknaa
drinking

^
niuul

-^

we

water

oumoureisye from well

f ^H

'i^
nanta
issues

The water we

drink comes from the well.


40

COEEAN MANUAL

PRONOMINAL SUBSTITUTES.
Jnstea
resort
relative
i

of employing the regular personal pronouns, Coreans constantly

to

of an honorific character, indicative of the speakers' rank &c., and mostly derived from Chinese. Among those most commonly

substitutes

used are the following:

^1
^1 ^}

chyei

chyeika
chanai
tangsin
taik

5.^
Ol.

nohyeng

^^ ^ ^^
4
"J^^,

sisamg

>

saine

taikam

nyengkam

"^^
pi^A*
person or of a third person

^
not
it

tai-in

a.
first

Chyei and cJiyeika, when used in the

pre5':)nt,

is

have a depreciatory or humble sense, but for the second person employed familiarly among friends in speaking to one another or in

addressing immediate dependants.

Chanai
to

is

generally restricted to familiar intercourse

among

friends

and

relations or is used in

addressing aged retainers and inferiors, where one desire^

be very courteous and considerate.

Tangsin
body".
It is

is

derived

from two Chinese words, meaning "representing

for

an honorific

addressing superiors,

"Sir".

its

Taik is a word of Chinese origin, meaning "house" or "mansion," though use as a pronominal substitute is a purely Corean idiom. It is used respectfully

for"7/ow"

among

equals in rank, being a less formal term than

tangsin and

less familiar

than chanai.

PRONOUNS.
Nohyeng, or "elder brother,"
use
is

41

among

Coreans,

as

a substitute

for

word of Chinese origin in constant the pronoun "you" in conversation

employed

between

equals.

Syoin,

or

"small man,"

is

derived from the Chinese, and

of themselves

is

by the

common
Sisaing,

people,

when speaking
born,"
is

before their superiors,

or by persons of military rank before

or "attendant
official

civil officers.

derived

from the Chinese, and

equals in rank.

is

used by inferiors in

rank in speaking of themselves to their superiors,

and

also, for the

sake of courtesy and politeness,

among

Suing,

which
of

is

derived from the Chinese and

of the educated
classes,

means "born,"
official

is

the

form employed by members

who have no

rank

when speaking
tendent."

themselves before their superiors.

is

Taikam,

derived from two Chinese words and

means "Great superin-

It is restricted to

High Mmisters

of state,

and may very accm^ately

be translated "excellency.

Byeng ham, from two Chinese words meaning "command superintendent"

is

the correct form for addressing officials of less exalted rank, though
officers,

it

may also

be used of very subordinate

when

the speaker wishes to be very polite.

Kong and Tai-in are two terms introduced into Corea from Japan and China respectively, consequent on the opening of the country to foreign trade
and intercourse:
Ko7ig
is

strictly a

Chinese word of polite signification and

"Jlfr.,"

may
it

properly

be held to correspond with our English

while as an honorific

has

much
is

the same force and use as the Corean term

tailc ;

Tai-in

is

derived from the two Chinese words

of,

"Great man", and

now

constantly used in speaking

or to foreign officials.

N. B.
a diacritical

No

attempt will be made on subsequent pages

to

distinguish by

mark

the tico

sounds 6l.and

in the transliteration of

En Moun-

11

42

NUMERALS.
100
il

43

paik

200

paik, etc.

1000
2000
10,000

il

ch'yen

Chinese Numerals for which there are no pure Corean equivalents.

ch'yen, etc
il

man,

etc.

>

OBDINAL
COREAK.
First

Chinese.
chyei
il

chetchai
toulchai
seitchai

Second
Third

chyei chyei

sam

Fourth

neitchai, etc.

chyei sa, etc.

ORDINAL ADVERBS.
Firstly

f^^
'"^

hanaheun
tourheun
seiseun

,^

ilheun

Secondly
Thirdly

^^

inan

^1^
V^l
"W*

sameun
sanan

Fourthly
Fifthly

^^

neiheun

-^ ,^Sl tasasseun

onan
ryoukeun
ch'ireun

Sixthly

CT

-^ ,;^ yesasseun

Seventhly

Eighthly

^ ^ ^ nilkopeun ^ ^ ^yetalpeun
6!

p'areun

Ninthly

J^
,IS1

J^L ahopeun
yeiheun, etc.

kounan
sipeun, etc.

Tenthly

^
of the

Corean numerals are thus drawn from Chinese, and before words of Chinese origin such numerals are generally used while the Corean numerals

Most

proper, which only extend from one to ninety-nine, are conjoined with words of

Corean origin or with such Chinese derivatives as are thoroughly assimilated into current colloquial thus sei nal, three days, are both purely Corean words but sam
;

il,

three days, are Chinese.


44

COKEAN MANUAL.

ABBBEVIATEB FOBMS OF NUMEBALS.

The first eight Corean numerals constantly occur in abbreviated forms, which are most frequently used in reckoning money, weight, measures, time
etc.

And

these

variations,

in

accordance

with the requirements of

initial

Corean

euphony, depend
they qualify.

for their exact

form on the

consonant of the noun which

Thus we
ban
tou
se

find

for

^"^

hana, one.
toul, two.

for

1
^
^
>*

^1
sei

for

seit, three.

sek

ne
nei
for
neit, four.

nek
tat for
tai

tasat, five.

yet
for

>

ye
nil

yesat, six.

for
for

nilkop, seven,
yetalp, eight.

yet

To

give the idea of

*'two or three," etc., the full

conveyed by our English idiom or abbreviated forms of the Corean numerals are
in this position even the abbrevi-

approximation,

used in pairs, without any conjunetion; and

ated forms are sometimes
still

further shortened.

Thus

han

t ^
^1
sei

'} ^1

One

or

two men.

tou

saram
or

Two
toue
kachi

or three kinds.

tou

kachi


NUMERALS.
><ij|

45

P^l
sei

'^
nal

or >4^

v^

1^
nal

Three or four days.

nei

sene

^1
nei lei
tasat

Four
chip
netet

or five houses.

chip

tai

ye

^4 ^^
yesat

Five or

six

pounds.

keim

tait

keun
Six or seven basins.

nilkop

keurat

^
nil

Seven or eight

bottles.

yetalp

pyeng
Eisht or nine bags.

yet

ahop

syem

FRACTIONS AND MULTIPLES.

^y
Other

pan

or

J^ ^L
and

chyelpan

is

the Corean equivalent for one

half.

fi'actions are

reckoned in the Chinese numerals, conjoined with the Chinese

chi, of, the possessive postposition
:

words poun,

division,

^^
^^^-^^kop,
the two

>^ J^ ^1 ^ >t v^
j

sam poun
sa

chi

il,

i.e

one of three divisions, or ^

three of four divisions, or |

poun

chi sam,

i.e.

Multiples are rendered by "91

of

pai,^^

kopchyel or yjt

kapchyel,

which the

last is generally

used with pure Corean numerals, and

first

more usually with those

or y<fl

of Chinese origin.

Thus

>y- ^1 sampai

-2.

s2zA;op= triple.
?jeiA:o2)= quadruple.

nj sapai,

-^^ sakop or|^] -2

*3 7r >^

yel

kap chyel=ten times.

NUMEBATIVES.
Just as in English

we speak

of a Jiock of sheep, a sheet of paper,

so

many head

of cattle, a suit of clothes, etc., so in Corean

we

find similar

terms

constantly employed as numeratives, or classifiers, as they have been termed,

for different classes of objects.

Subjoined

is

a hst of those numerative terms

12


46

COKEAN MANUAL.
in use
:

which are most commonly

1.

VI
-for persons.

13^ myeng

2Xm 7iom, (impolite)

2.

"Oi

^
p'ii

meri, head

for animals generally.

a.

^
-^

for horses
for

and

cattle generally
etc,

pack horses,

loaded and loads.

4.

^p'il,

bale

for cloth, piece goods, etc.

for books, rolls of paper, etc.

5.

kouen,

volume
sheet

6.

jMSc%aw^,

^
8.

for paper.
^oi/ew,

quire

^ ch'youk,
^}j
/i;ai

ream
for boots, stockings, etc.

for articles generally,

for small articles, grain, etc.

5.

X^nat
"^i^eZ, suit

10.

for clothes.

"^ wow^,
m^

bundle
-for

straw, firewood, etc.

XX'tan, sheaf
12.

'^

for hats, mats, bags,

money,

etc.

13.
14. 15.

;;i ^charo

handle,

for pens, fans, etc. for boats,

J^

ch'yeJc,

and

ships.
e.g.

^S^chchalc, for one of a pair of articles,

shoes, loads, leaves

of a door, etc.

NUMERALS.

47

Exercise IX.
(Numerals and Numeratives)
1.

t han
one

^}|
saram

^^
oasso.

man
One person came.

came.

2.

saram

man

hana poasso. one I saw I saw one man.

ton

nyep'yennei

han

chipei

sao

two

women Two ladies

in house one occupy one dwelling.

hve

4.

^1
se

-&*)
toni

pouchyok

44
after

-f-^
hao
:

three

ton *

There are

insufficient thirty cash short

sek nyang man chouera three 7iyang I only give give only three hundred cash.

4 ^
^l
chip

"i

^*14

^
sek three

1
tal

^'A houei
months and
''I

i
sei

^
ta
all

4^^
sakeisso
will

moon
Wait
three

three
I will

house

buy

buy

all

the three houses.

^^
ssal

nek

syem

^
ne

^i-

mal

^^^
namasso
-elmana
toio

rice

pecks pecul four remain four There are four pecul and four pecks of rice remaining.

namou wood

tat

mout
bundle
is

kapsi
price

how much

become

What

the price of five bundles of wood.

tai

yesat 6

chim
load

Buy

onal sa today buy some five or six loads only today.

man

onera

only

come

* 1 ton, 10 cash.

1 nyang,

100 cash.

48

COKE AN MANUAL.

Exercise X.
{Numerals and Numeratives)
1.

ie|
pori barley

^
yet 6

-^
mal

4
ye

>g

chip yet koa mout mal pecks and straw 6 bundles horse The horse had 6 pecks of barley and 6 bundles

^ ^

t
mekiesso
fed
of straw.

2.

6
1

_ft.vi?|.
moulken
kachi kachye article kinds having taken 6 7 Bring some 6 or 7 kinds of this article
nilkop

onera

this

come

3.

3.^
mokoun
cooUe

i.
nil

H
8

ea

yetalp

^Vl saram
men
r

i^
poulle
called
vJ

jLi^ef
onera

come

Get some seven

4.

or eight coolies.

a
keu
that

tz^
ttai

^-1
soreul

^
yet

ahop

time

9 slaughtered ox 8 Some 8 or 9 oxen were slaughtered at that time.

mori head

^^

45!-^
chapasso

5.

^
kounsa
soldiers

-r
tou

^
niyeng

Pl|

maireul

-f^ ^ machyetta
met

two

names
soldiers

Two

whips have been flogged.

JL
kyokoun-koun
chair-bearers

*ia

poulle yetalp called individual eight Get eight chair coolies.

^ nom

^-^

J^

v^

ef

onera

come

7,

cheumsaing
animals

yere
several

mari head

chapasso
seized

He

killed several animals.

^
talk

1
hau
one

fowl

"J: man meri only head Cook one fowl only.

^H 4
chichyera
fry

NUMERALS.

49

Exercise XI.
(Numerals and Numeratives).

I
mal

^1
sei

4 ^
p'il

koa

'^l^
nei four
p'il

^1

"fl

Jt

sf

so

horse three

{7ium)

(num) and ox Hire three ponies and four bullocks,

sak-naiye hired

onera

come

so

tou

pari-myen

chyokhi

sitkeitta

ox

two

Two
mok

loads-ifbe enough bullocks can easily carry this.

will load

yang

myet

p'iri-na*
bales- ever

isso

cotton goods

how many How many bales of

are

piece goods are there?

4.

Jl
keu
that

4)
ch'aik

^
seumou

6^

kouen nilkesso tou-e two-or-three volumes have read book I have read a few volumes of that book.

^^>fc

3ifc>a
chyosyen Corean

^^ ^^
chyoheui paper

^i=^l
chyangi

t^i
han kouen

'^iJ!.
io
is

sheet one quire twenty Twenty sheets of Corean paper make one quire.

>a
sin

t
han
one

shoe

tou k'yeri ponaio pesyen oa k'yeri pairs send. two and stockings pair Send a pair of shoes and two pair of stockings.
^

^^ 4 ^^
)t
nat

-T

^^ ^"^^

^ t
ssal

5:
to also

Mi^

4^^1
^

han

naiye-parichi
rice.

4^
mara
avoid

rice

throw away one {mc7n) Don't throw away even one grain of the

pyektol
bricks

paik

100

How much

elmanya kapsi how much price will one hundred bricks cost?
kai

num

*See foot note on page 50,

rs

50

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise XII.
{Numerals and Numeratives)

chyang
press

sokei

ot

han
one

pel
suit

isso
is

within

clothes

There

is

a suit of clothes inside the press.

2^J
chip

han

straw

koa namou han mout sa onera and wood one bundle bought one bundle come Buy one bundle of straw and one bundle of wood.

jc
mout

4 ^^
ton

t 5

^1-

-^^^

kat hat

han
one

nip (/mw) See

chari

nip

ta

it-na *

poara
see

mat
if

two (nufn) all is-whether you have got one hat and two mats.

pout

han
one

4^
charo handle

S.
to

^J

^J:
epso not is

pen

Not

sseul ket even about to use thing even a single pen is of any use.

keu
that

moulken
article

ch'yekei han ta pai mot iiium.) one not all boat One boat cannot carry all those goods.

sitkeitta

will load

chim
load

han
one

chchak

man chye-ta f {mim) only carried Carry only one load there.

touera place

Na
Ta

and ina are euphonic

enclitic particles, signifying ever,

at least,

whether, though,
t

may

be, etc.

is

merely an enclitic particle placed

euphony.
the
participle
(it),"

after

chye,

the perfect par-

ticiple of chita (I carry), for the sake of

colloquial.

With kanta

(I go)

added: katta touera, "having gone, place

Corean ka is used but tta (not ta) is meaning "go and put (it)."

It appears constantly in

NUMERALS.

51

Exercise XIII.
{Fractions arid Multiples).

i^
syoul

pan

wine

half only give Give half a glass of wine only.

en an chan cup

'i

man

chouo

4t
1

4
man
only
chi-ko carry-and

ssal

chyelpan
half

this

rice

kakera go

Carry only half of this rice away.

3,

6]
1

^]
pai ship

J.
keu
that This ship

JL

cj.

>j- |

vj.

^ c^
k'euta
large

this

pai pota sampai-na ship-in comparison triple-at least is three times larger than that one.

chikeum

now

sisyei-nan kapchyel te market price as for double more The market price is now twice as dear.

^M

^1

3l4J^
pis-ssao

dear

^)^
n-en

i^d
moulken
6|
i

such

kopchyel man te kachye article double only more bring Bring double the quantity of these articles.

^^
C|.

"d

^1

7H -^^4
on era

come

Jkeu

^J
chnn

;g

-3.

6] Vf

^^
"pouera pour

T^

that load

this

chim pota sa kop-i-na moukepta in comparison load quadruple-at least heavy That load is four times as heavy as this one.

X3
7.

4
syoul

moureun
as for water

pota

neikapchyereul

wine

Mix
8.

in comparison quadruple four of water with one of wine.

J.
keu
that

moulken
article

p'al-ttaiei

rika

sakop-i-na

namasso

The

profit in selling-time quadruple-ever remained sale of that article left a profit of 400 per cent.


52

COEEAN MANUAL

METHODS OF BECKONING
The
following are the

TIME, SEASONS, ETC.

time

names

for the chief divisions of

Core AN.
Year

Chinese.

METHOD OF RECKONING
Tenth month

TIME.

53

54

COKEAN MANUAL.
The word
clVo nsecT with the first ten

numerals in the above table

is

deriveu from the OhineoO

itheul, etc.

aid signifies the "first decade" of the month.

iisecT

Haro,

may
;

also be

Vvithout this prefix to indicate the

first

ten days

of the

month but more

generally,

when thus
etc.

standing alone, these words express

a period of time,

of

one day, two days

locative

And
ei,

in this latter case they may-

appear

either

with the
,

case-ending

or joined as adjectives to the

word tsL

^1

7nanei, a period.

In the same way porajn, when used apart from nal, generally means
a period of 14 or 15 days, or, as

we

should say, a fortnight.

of

Appended

is

list

of

some
etc.

the words most frequently used in

the

computation of times, seasons

which have not yet been noticed.

METHOD OF KECKONING
Last year

TIME.
cbyen nyen

r,n

7.HI

kan hai

^ v^

>y- \A chak nyen

^^
7J
Year before
This month
last

syang nyen

Vg^ke nyen

JX

^^

keuretkeui^j

>^

v^

chaichak nyen

56

COKE AN MANUAL.

Exercise XIV.

cli'o

haro nal

oasso

first

day

came

He

arrived on the 1st

itheul memeuresso two days waited having stopped two days on the road.
kireisye

on road

yekeuisye here from

luyetcb'irei

how many

How
3.

kasso f::one days in long have you taken to go

naheurei
four days in Four days. ?

kasso

gone

a,ina

tai

yessai
six

manei*
period

toraokeisso
will

perhaps

five

come back

I shall return perhaps in

4.

some

5 or G days.

poram
fortnight

houei
after

oasso

poram nal
and

poasso

came

He came

after a fortnight

saw fifteenth day I saw }jim on the 15th.

kyeourei winter-in
It is

tepta ch'ipko nyeramei is hot cold-and summer-in cold in winter and hot in summer.

4*^1
pomei
spring-in

^JajI
simeuko sow and

yl-k^]
kaeurei

7]-f4
ketv)unta

autumn-in You sow in spring and reap in autumn.

reap

H|
I

7).

<^:t]
yekeui here
I

cj.

^1
hai

^ 3.^-k
memeuresso
have stayed

naika

tasat
five

years
five years.

have lived here

i
nal

^*1
houei
after

t^
han pen

toue two-three

kou kyeng

i-^

7f4 kacha
let

days

Let us go

for a picnic in a

sight seeing one time few days.

us go

* This

would he equally well expressed by the use

of

5l

^t

a participial form
keisso.

of^

'C\-to accomplish.

Thus, aw tai yessai toiyeya torao-

METHOD OF RECKONING TIME

57

Exercise XY.
1

^^
onal
to

7H
kasye
ha\'ing gone Go to day and

^Pl
nai-il

^^Jl^ ^
tora

onera

day

morrow come back come back to morrow.

to

echyekkeui poasso keu ch'aik yesterday saw that book I read that book yesterday.
3.

^^1

v}

oj.

6|

-^A] J.
hasio

or

3} M]
koa-syei past-year

hoan-syeina p'yen ani exchange-year may-be weU

^
well

i-4

>t

c'ual

hasyesso

A
sin-kou-syeiei

make Happy New Year

have made?

to you!

new-old-year-in

May
5.

all

keuiouni ettesio strength how is health and happiness be yours!

nohyengfcui
elder brother's

erousinnei father

nyensyei
year-year your father?

myetch'isio

how much

is?

How

old is

^4
ryouk
sixty
sip

J.
is

^]_

5|4^
toisyesso

sj'ei o five years

has accomplished

He
keu
that

sixty five years of age.

aheui

boy

myet how-many
old
is

syel * inya

How
i

cakes is? that boy? He

yetalp syel mekesso has eaten eight cakes is eight years old.

this

chyekeunya k'eunya is small? great? Are there 29 or 30 days in this month ?

tari

month

is

>9

is

the

name

of a special

form of cake eaten on

New Year's

Day.

It

has

passed into a famiHar formula for reckoning the age of inferiors or equals.

15


58

COKEAN MANUAL.

ADJECTIYES.
Adjectives are of two kinds
(i)
:

Words

that undergo no inflexion or modification.

adjectivally
to qualify

These are either

primarily

nouns used

another noun, or true adjectives

derived from the Chinese.

Thus

4^a
soi

*1syang mal

An
(2)

keurat iron bason.

in

Common

speech.

Words

which verb and adjective are combined and which are

ordinary verbs'

conjugated exactly like

chyot'a
plural.

in

fact

which are true verbs.

all

Thus

means "I am good, thou art good, etc" for The participial forms, however, supply the
and

persons,

singular and

true adjective, and as such

always precede the nouns they qualify, whereas the predicate forms follow the
subject
close the phrase or sentence, as in the case of the verb.

Thus

chyoheun saram A good man.

sarami chyot'a

The man

is

good.
all

Adjectives of this second class are capable of assuming

fications, expressive of tense,

the

modi-

And

of these

some
:

of the

mood, etc., proper to a regularly conjugated verb. most important will be found in the appended tables

of conjugation

while other modifications, such as the conditional in myen, the

etc.,

causal in nikka,

which are in constant use may be readily formed on the

model

of the ordinary verb.

The two
to give

participles

known as the "verbal" and "adjective" participles

:

are the ruling forms of the adjectival conjugation

and of these, as

it is difficult

any rule of anything

is

like universal application for their formation,

selection of specimens

here given

Present.
kilta

Verbal Participle.

Adjective

Participle.

7]^
,^r

kire

p^

kin

(long)
(short)

chareuta
nelpta

VL
(A

challa

^L J^-

chareun

nelpe

^
,;^

J^
,^

nelpeun (broad)

44

chopta

,^. 6l*

chopa

chopeun (narrow)

ADJECTIVES.

59

Present.

Verbal Participle.

Adjective Participle.

^^^

60

COEEAN MANUAL.

G2

COEEAN MANUAL.

Present

(polite)

ADJECTIVES.

63

Present
(polite)

aramtapta
)-I

aramtapso
aramtaoatta
aramtapkeitta
I

am

lovely, etc.

Past

was

lovely,

etc.

Future
Interrogative
(polite)

I shall be lovely, etc.

aramtaounya
'

^am
|

tit I lovely,

etc

i.

aramtapso

Part, verbal
adjective

aramtaoa

lovely
lovely

aramtaon
aramtapki
2L

,,

,,

adverb
>>

V lovely

aramtai

) >

Substantive

^7]
^l-l'^-^

aramtapki

loveliness

aramtaom

Present
(polite)

^ ^ ^^^
>^ ij 4:

sarangseurepta
1

am

amiable, etc.

Past

Future
Interrogative

^ ^^ >^ ^ 4^ >^ "^

i2}-

^^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ rt
J5-

sarangseurepso

sarangseureouetta

was amiable,

etc.

sarangseurepkeitta I shall be amiable.

V^

sarangseureounya
sarangseurepso

^ j amiable, etc.
amiable amiable

(polite)

>^
>t

Part, verbal

adjective^

adverb

>^

^ J: ^ ^ ^ 4] ^^ ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ^|
>ii

sarangseureoue

sarangseureon
sarangseurei

Umiably
J

sarangseurepkei

Substantive

>t

>t

^^ ^ f^ ^

7]
-I-

sarangseurepki

I.

^^^i^^nity

sarangseureom

64

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise XYI.
7a
kin

^y-h
nokkeun
long string.

317^
nokkeun

7lx^
kilta
is

A
2.

The

string

long.

^14
nelp'an board

v^oi
nenie too The board

y]z]
kire
is

^1
chal well

^^^^
chareuta
is

mos-sseukeitta long not-will use too long and won't do.

chareuQ

ch'amtai

ch'anita,i

short bamboo.

The bamboo

short.

totchari

mat The mat

is

challa mot kkalkeitta not will spread short too short to cover (the floor).

nelpeun A broad

pat
field.

patch'i

The

field is

nelpta broad.

kiri

nelpe

tanniki

ciiyot'a

road

travelling broad is good The road is broad and good for walking.

pa^ig chopeun A narrow room.

pangi

The room

is

chopta narrow.

8.

^,| pai

^o\5l

1^|

>3?t>|.
sitnanta load
load.

boat

chim chopato manhi load narrow though many The boat though narrow can carry a large

ADJECTIVES.

65

Exercise XYII.

kipheun

moul

Deep

water.

3.

4.

5.

66

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise XYIII.

^6|
nari

t^^^^
teoue-sye hot
travelling
is difficult

7f7]
kaki

^n^
eryepta
is difficult

day

going
in this

warm

weather.

2.

keu
that

moul
water

kiphe-sye

deep The water

chal well
is

mot
not

kenne
across

ka
go

too deep for crossing.

keu
that

saram

erye-sye-pout'e

man

He

young-from has been a student from his

kongpou work
earliest years.

hayesso has made

keu
that

neulkeun-i *

chyelme-sye-pout'e

aged

That old man

pyeng young-from sickness has been ailing from his youth.

teuresso entered

nal

day

momi chom natta teoue-sye-pout'e little is convalescent hot-(euph) from body I am in better health since the warm weather.

6.

echei

etoue-sye-pout'e

yesterday

pi sichakhayesso rain began It began to rain at dusk yesterday.

dark-from

te

more

chyoheul pepi innanya good (future) law is ? Could there be a better law?

more

chyoheul pepi epso is not good (future) law There could not be a better law.
te

^
te *

^
k'eul

^J^l
chipi

^vt t:^ epso

vj.^

^
better.

more high

(future) house is not There could not be a bigger house.

pyello naheul ket epso specially superior (future) thing is not

There could be nothing

The

converts the adjective participle into

noun,

being

in

fact

the nominative case inflexion.

ADJECTR^S.
67

COMPABISON OF ADJECTIVES.
The Comparative degree
(1)

is

rendered by
or potem,

^r^ jL ^poi(i
with

than,
is

placed as a suffix directly after

the object

which comparison

made.
te

These
and

suffixes are

some-

times used in conjunction with the particles

tel.

(-)

"Ol

^c,

niore, or

tcl less,

which are placed immediately preceding the

particles,

adjective.

In negative sentences constructed with these

the

object

v/itli

which comparison

is

made

generally appears in the ablative

for the sake of

case (ending in eisye)

more

however

euphony than from

any requirements of Corean syntax.

(3)

t^ _5uor

,5^toroli or t'orok, more, joined as a suffix to

is

the stem

of the verb, tense.

is

which

formed by dropping the

final ta of

the present
t'a, t'orok

Where

the present tense has the aspirated termination

used.

It should

be noted that these suffixes are also used as post-posi-

tions with the sense of iintiL

(4)

S^sarol:, more,
I)

is

used as a

suffix in

conjunction with the future

participle (ending in

of both verbs

and
te

adjectives,

and

is

not unfrequently

followed by the comparative particle

or teok.

The

Sitperljtive

degree

is

rendered by prefixing to the adjective adverbs of

inteusity

such

as the following

HJ .^??iaiou,
Oi.

very;
entirely;

^achou,

jO. ^1 koahi, excessively;

^ ^kachang,
neme

greatly;

and paiticularly and most emphatically by the use

numeral t^l
^\ chyei
il,

of the Chinese ordinal

first.

68

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise XIX.
6]
i

>i
san
hill

a
keu
that

>^}^^
4)JL^
ch'aik
is

this

This
2.

hill is

san pota nopta hill than is high higher than that.

^^
^^
is

*]
i

4)
ch'aik

JX
keu
that

potem

this

book

This book
3.

book than better than that

natta superior

keu
that

kyeichipi

te

myohata
is

woman
That

more

beautiful

woman

is prettier.

4.

keu
that

mar-eun
horse-as-for

tel

saonapta
is

less
is

fierce

That horse

not so vicious.

moureun
water-as-for

this

syeoul Syeoul
is

moul

potem

te

chyot'a
is

This
6.
i

water than more better than the water in Seoul.

good

syouri

this

wine

syour-eisye te chyoheun ket wine-from more good thing This wine is no better than the other.

keu

that

is

epta not

6)
i

^J;
k'al

a
keu
that

t^H
k'ar-eisye
is

^
te

^^
chal

^ ^
teul

"^^
is

this

knife

knife-from

This knife

sharp no sharper than the other.

more

ket thing

epta not

kiri

chye
that

this

road

potem kil katkaon te than near road more Is this road shorter than that one?

kirinya

road

is ?

ADJECTIVES.

69

Exercise XX.
1.

man-t'orok

chyot'a
is

manheul-sarok

chyot'a
is

many-more

good

many-more
better.

good

The more the

kapsi
price

nouk-torok cheap-more

mitchinta
lose

noukeul-sarok

mitcbinta
lose

money
the price the

cheap-more

money

The cheaper

more

I lose.

kil

kal-sarok

te

hemhata
is

road

going-more

The more

precipitous (we) go, the worse the road.

more

chaimoul

mohol-sarok

t'amhata

covet collecting-more money The more he gets, the more he wants.

0.

po-torok see-more

sarangsenrepta
is

lovable

The more
6.

I see him, the

more I love him.

chou-torok give-more

tallftnta

he demands

choul-sarok gi\'ing-more

tallanta

he demands

The more

I give the

more he wants.

neulk-torok
aged-mitil

He

pereussi habit maintains that habit all his

that

ken

itta
is
life.

4IJ.4
ch'youi-t'orok

t
syoul

1*1 meke
is

dmnk-until

wine

He
18

drinks until he

drinks drunk.

70

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise XXI.
13
1

3-^] >;
massi
taste

^]-^
maiou
very

:4
chyot'a
is

eumsik-eun
food-as-for

this

good

This food has the best flavour.

2.

keu
that

ch'yaksiri jekeni-sye melta truly here-from house is far That house is a good distance from here.

chip

^^
Ji.

6^ ;) 7>
echei-ka yesterday

c4]

chyei-il
first

% ^]^
ch'ioun
cold

t *l
nari-o
daj'-is

Yesterday was the coldest day.

4^1
koahi exceedingly
it

^^
k'e-sye big

^<&^y}
mos-sseukeitta not will use is too big.

won't do

if it

tarn

te

this

wall

more

nopk'ei highly

ssamyen
if

ton

manhi

mekkeitnanya
will eat?

build

money
it

much
cost

If I build this wall higher will

6.

much?

4^1
ton

ot^l
manhi

]^)oJ.J:
mek-chianso
eat-not

koahi
excessively

money

much

It will not cost so very

7.

much.

^
haika sun
chi
set

torok
until

^51 mouet
what
been doing
all

T^V^
hayetnanya have done ?

What have you

day

a
chyongil
all

hayesso labour day have made I have been studying all day.

kongpou

etm, the oppositive case ending has a restrictive force

and

indicates

one kind of food out of

* Jcong pou
is

many supposed
a

to be present before the eyes of the speaker,

word derived from the Chinese, meaning labour generally:

himself.

but in Corean the meaning has become restricted to study, as being the only

kind of labour to which a native gentleman would condescend to devote


VEKBS.

71

YEBBS.
The most
mass
time,
of inflection
characteristic feature of the

Corean language
is

is

the complex

and agghitination whereby the verb

subordina,tion,

modified to express
interrogation, official

mood, condition, co-ordination and

rank, etc.

in
(as

short almost every var^nng shade of thought or action.

ledge of the verb

and

Elnow-

in this has to be included the adjective,

which in Corean

combines

we have
and

seen) the adjective proper with the verb "to be"

all

implies

a thorough acquaintance with

in etjTnologj'
s}Titax.

the intricacies of the

Corean language both

Even

the ordinary Conjunction constitutes part

suffix to the

of the verb inflexion,

modifying and appended as a

in the sentence

different

tenses.

Many

of

these

socalled Conjunctions are used merely as

marks

to indicate the breaks or divisions

function fulfilled in English by our system of pimctuation.

difficulty of the

Their correct employment presents one chief

Corean language
"punctuation

and involves a close study of the

for

colloquial, especially

as

these

conjunctions" are frequently meaningless in themselves

and are only inserted

of a sentence.
:

euphony

as

connecimg hnks between the

different

parts

Verb modifications may be divided into two categories

(1)

Simple inflexions
the verb

i.e.

agglutinations

v/hose original

meanings as

such have early disappeared and which are

now

found only incorporated into

of differences of

and forming part

tense,

of,

itself,

as aids to the expression

mood,
(2)

etc.

Agglutinations properly socalled,

ideas and added as suffixes to the verb

to supply deficiencies in the

i.e. words expressing independent stem while retaining their original meaning,

Corean vocabulary.

In the present, past, and future tenses the inflexions are regular and
simple.

An

equal regularity marks the participial formations so

much used
or
c

in in

Corean

colloquial.

The

verbal participle is always foimd ending in a

;

accordance with the requirements of euphony

and the law is that with the two long and strong vowels a and o in the stem, the strong a closes the partiwhile with other vowels and diphthongs and also with a short o in the ciple stem, the weak vowel e marks the participle ending. This verbal participle is
;

an ever recurring form of the verb inflexion, ha\-ing in addition to its orioinal signification and use as a participle, the Vvddest possible range both in meaning'

and

in application.

It appears as

an imperative,
;

is

fi-equently

substituted for

the present, past and other tenses

requirement of Corean colloquial,

and can as a general rule supply every being at all times and in all connexions clear

and

easily understood.

72

COEEAN MANUAL.
All division of the

Corean verb into tense, mood, participle or voiee

is

purely arbitrary and conventional.

On the

part of native scholars and students

no attempt has ever been made to reduce their vernacular to any grammatical system or to formulate any vocabulary of the language beyond the Ok P'yen a coinpilation intended to facilitate the correct pronunciation, and to expound
the meanings, of the Chinese characters.

Grouping the verbal terminations

their allied
(1)

for inflexion

and agglutination under

and cognate forms, four

diifsrent conjugations

may

be evolved

series of

endings

in ta,

which
it

may

be legitimately termed

the "ordinary" conjugation, presenting as

the principal modifications

does the primary form from which

may

be constructed.

In colloquial use this conjuga-

tion is employed in addressing inferiors in rank, or informally in current con-

versation amongst equals.

(2)

A A

series of endings in

nya which constitute the interrogative form

corresponding with the "ordinary" conjugation.

(3)

series of

endings in o and so which Coreans employ

when they

address equals or superiors and which

(4)

may be

designated the "polite" conjugation.

series

of agglutinations added to the verb stem of the various

tense inflexions to express condition, time, manner, co-ordination, subordination,

etc.
i.e.

agglutinations which have very often the force and use of

mere con-

junctions.
is this

This

may

be aptly termed the "conjunction

conjugation".

And

it

conj ugation in particular the acquisition of

which

will require the serious

attention of the student of the language.

The present
(1) (2)

tense of the "ordinary" conjugation shows two forms

in ta (or t'a in nta.

The ending
The ending
is

where the verbaJ

ia

participle is aspirated)

This latter
either

the correct inflexion with a

or

noun
the

or pronoun as subject to the verb,

expressed

understood.
of

On

other hand ta (or fa)

subject and

employed in a general sense irrespective

any

definite
etc.)

much

in the

same way

as

we

resort to the infinitive ("to

make"

where we wish
verb there

to refer to the verb generally.

In short ta

(or t'a)

implies general,

while nta implies specific predication of the verb's action.

falls to

But under the Corean

be included the part of speech

known

in English as the adjective,

and with these "adjective verbs," as they may very properly be designated, the use of ta and nta is reversed. Thus ta is the regular inflexion for predication in the present tense while the form nto, which is found only in certain words, produces a new sense and meaning. For instance in the phrase "7ial palkta"

we have

the signification "the day

is

clear," but in

"nal palknanta, "the day

is

clearing up".

CONJUGATION OF VEEBS,
The past made by
tense
is

73

formed by adding

tia to the verbal participle; while

the

future
ta

is

substituting keitta

{Jc'eitta in

the case of aspirated stems) for

Jckeitta in the

of the first
this

where

form of the present tense. This becomes present tense end in tta.

few verbg

Inflected to express time,

as regards action, the

mood, condition and endless shades of meaning

for person or

Corean verb possesses no distinction

number

and one form stands for the singular and plural including all persons, first, Coreans as a rule avoid having recourse to pronouns, and second and third. the person and number must consequently be inferred from the context especially
in the colloquial.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS,
Section

l.OBDINABY CONJUGATION.
(I

'S

^\

hata, I

make

speak).

Indicative Present

make, thou makest, il he makes, we make, etc.

t>
>>

Past

^
"^

X
TJj

"^^^y^^^^

made,

etc.

Future

PJL hakeitta I shall make, etc.

Imperative

^^

^hayera
hacha

make.
let

t4
Belative Participle

us make.

Present

^
%

hanan

m*king.

Past
,,

Future
Imperfect
Perfect

^ ^ ^
-^ C^
'S'

ban
h&l

made.
about to make,

,,

haten

made.

^
ti

^1 ^ayetten made.
""

Verbal Participle

-g^ e)^

haye

^
* haija is
c(,n

hayesye fbaving made.

irregular

form occasionally heard in Coreaia

colloquial.

19

14:

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

75

Rel. Part. Present

^^
J^

onan

coming.

Past

on
ol

come.
about to ome.

.,

Future
Imperfect
Perfect

JJL p)

oten
oatten

come. come.
having come,

^ t^
$,

Verbal Participle

>

oasye

6| 'Cl

itta,

I am, I have.

Indicative Present

*I4
6|

itta

am or have,

thou art or hast,

etc.

Past
,,

>M
7?|

Cl- issetta

I was, or had, etc.

Future

6^
r

Cl itkeitta

I shall be, or shall have, etc,

Imperative

^1 ^issera

be, or have.

6
Bel. Part.

5!4

itcha

let

us be or

let

us have,

Present

innan
issan

being or having,

Past

been or had.
about to be or to have,

Future
Imperfect
Perfect

5!4 6| ^
<i\

issal

itten

been or had.
been or had.

jA

issetten
isse

Verbal Participle

2^1
6)

having been.
issesye

Xl /A

7G

COEEAN MANUAL.

CH

pL

epta, I

am

not,

or I have not.

Indicative

Present

CONJUGATION OF

\T^RBS.

77

Eel. Part. Present

78

COKEAN MANUAIi.

Jcl

ch'ita, I strike.

CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.

Eel. Part. Present

JT

08

COEEAN MANUAL.

yX pL

chapta, I catch.

Indicative Present

>^ ' Cj.

cliapta

"

'

II

catch, etc.

^'
Past

}T

X\ chamnanta ^r chapatta

^
^

'

jt
7j|

I caught, etc.
I shall catch, etc. catch.
let

Future
Imperative

chapkeitta

V*

^r

iM-chapara

chapcha
Eel. Part. Present

us catch.

>^

JT

charanan

catching.

Past

44
;^
>^ ^^

chapeun
chapeul

caught.

.,,

Future
Imperfect
Perfect

^
Pl
61.

about to catch.
caught.
caught.

chapten

,,

6|. p| chapatten

Verbal Participle

>^

chapa

having caught.

'- "Cl-

oulta, I WBex) er cry.

lufdicative

Present
>>

j>

Past
,,

Future

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

81

Bel. Part. Present

^^

Past

,,

Future
Imperfect
Perfect

Verbal Participle

^^

xX'

nott'a,

I release.

Indicative

Present

Past

Future
Imperative

Bel.

Part,

Present

Past

,,

Future
Imperfect
Perfect

Verbal Participle

82

COREAN MANUAL.

.^fl

Cl

ssitta, I v/ash.

Indicative Present

.^M

'C\'

ssitta

^1
Past

I wash, etc.

i^^ssinnanta
Cvesissetta
T^saitkeitta
I washed, etc.
I shall wash, etc.

-^ /^

Future
Imperative

>^ tA
>^ Xt
^J
j^L

^Lssissea
ssitcha

wash.
let

us wash.

Eel. Part. Present

ssmnan

washincf.

,,

Past

^^
.^

ssissan
ssissal

washed,
about to v/ash.

Future
,,

Imperfect
Perfect

p|
C?]

ssitteu

washed washed

,,

>^ >^
^^A
>^"j

ssissetten
ssisse

Verbal Participle

having washed.

aA /A JA

ssissesye

7I

^ 1^

"rt

kitarita, I wait.

Indicative

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

83

Rel. Part. Present

y] "O 21
71
y\

kitarinan
kitarin
kitaril

waiting,

Past
,,

Future
Imperfect
Perfect

^^ ^^
^^ ^^ ^ XS ^

waited.

about to wait,
waited,
waited.

,,

7| '^

kitariten

7]
-^l

kitaryetten

Verbal Participle

kitarye

havinc: waited.

CCL

antta, I

sit.

84

COEEAN MANUAL.

"Ci-

alta, I

know.

Indicative Present

>>

CONJUGATION OF

\T:RBS.

85

Eel. Part. Present

86

COKE AN MANUAL.
ISSO

be I
;

am

or have,

am

or have I ?
?

5!

4^

issesso
itkeisso

was or had, was or had I

I shall be or have, shall I be or have ?

epso
epsesso
epkcisso

am

or have not,

am

or have I not ?
?

I v/as or

had not, was or had I not

I shall not be or have, shall I not be or have ?

poo
poasso
pokeisso

look

I look, do I look ?

I have looked, have I looked ? I shall look, shall I look ?

cli'io

strike
I

I strike,

do I strike

ch'yesso
ch'ikeisso

have struck, have I struck ?

I shall strike, shall I strike ?

chouo
chouesso
choukeisso

give; I give, do I give?

I have given, have I given ?

I shall give, shall I give ?

mekso
mekesso
mekkeisso

eat

I eat,

do I eat

I have eaten, have I eaten ? I shall eat, shall I eat ?

chap so
chapasso
chapkeisso

seize, I seize,

do I seize

I have seized, have I seized ?

I shall seize, shall I seize ?

nosso
iiobasso

release

I release, do I release ?

I have released, have I released ?

I shall release, shall I release ?

nok'cisso

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

87

^>fc


COEEAN MANUAL.

6J.W}.
antta

ancheuii

ancbeupsyeita

Let us

sit

ssitta

ssissan

ssissapsyeita

Let us wash
form
of

A
Conjugation

very
is

common and more markedly

courteous

the
is

PoHte
formed

that which ends in sio in the Present Indicative.

This

from the Past Eelative Participle by substituting the termination sio for the final n, and may be used affirmatively, interrogatively, or imperatively in speaking
of or to ones superiors in rank.
sio

Where used

as

an Imperative, the force of

corresponds exactly to our English word "please":

Please

make,

do

you

make ? He makes, etc.

hata

han

hasio

6 I) a] ,^^1 ,Ju
pota

Please see, do you see ?

He

sees, etc.

pon

posio

^^
chouta
antta

^
choun
iX

^^

""^l

"-^

Please give, do you give ?

He

gives, etc.

chousio

J He

sits,

etc.

ancheun

ancheusio

This form of the Polite Conjugation extends through nearly

all

moods
poasso,

and

tenses.

Thus we

find posesso, posikeisso, posimyen, posin,

etc.
is

etc., for

pokeisso,

pomyen, pon,

Another "polite" form of the present Indicative

cfiio,

that which ends in

this termination being substituted for the final ta of the present tense in
it

the "ordinary" Conjugation.

When used with the first or third person an affirmative, with the second person always an interrogative, sense
:

has

make, he makes, we make, they make, do you make ?

hata

hachio
I go, he goes,
go,

we

go, they

do you go?

kata

kachio

89

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
I come, he comes, we come, they come, do you come ?

Ota

ochio

2^ ^1
^^
nott'a

2X, 5tl

y^

-J^

'-

release,

he releases, we release,

they release, do you release?

notch'io

N.B.

The termination

is

aspirated thus

ch'io, in

the case of verbs ending

in aspirated t'a in the present tense of the Ordinary

Inferiors, addressing their superiors

Conjugation.
to be exceedingly polite,
first

and wishing

use the conjugation ending in pnaita, opnaita, sapnaita, saopnaita, for the
or third person singular or plural.

This
is

is

read mnaita,

etc.,

according to the

requirements of Corean euphony, and

either
(1)

formed
for the final

by substituting pnaita

of the

Past Relative Participle:

hata


90

COIIEAN MANUAL.
or
(8)

by substituting sapnaita or saopnaita

Present Indicative where a consonant,

for the final ta of tbe

k,
I,

in, n,

p ort
:

closes

the syllable immediately preceding the termination

luckta

meksamnaita
^1

meksaomnaita

^J

el en*
ilt'a

^^ N
tJ

Zt

>-

JL
U

U
"I

t+
I

Ilose,welose,heloses, they lose,

ilsamnaita

ilsaomnaita

^4 t^^l4
tamla

^^^"-^^
tamsaomnaita

fill,

we
fill.

fill,

he

fills,

they

tamsamnaita

dXxX \L
\

6iy^
U.
tl

U
^1

Cl
r

-^V-l Cl 6l->t ^
U.

I embrace,

we embrace
etc.

/*!

he embraces,

anta

ansamnaita

ansaomnaita

vf

r chapi a

^
J^

t3

i
xA
^1

chapsamnaita

^^
Jl}

chapsaomnaita

seizes,

they seize.

A tl Oi
*^r
sitta

^<

^
\i

Ct

*^r sissamnaita

J^ JL yJ Cl Oi "^ "I r
sissaomnaita

I, l^f^cl,

we load, he loads, they load,

Similarly sapnaita and saopnaita are substituted for the final ta of the
Indicative Past and Future tenses of the Ordinary Conjugation.

Thus

hayetta

hayessamnaita

hayessaomnaita

t ^ '^ ^
hakeitta

^1/%^]^

-f >3

hakeissamnaita

.>^ 1.^1 hakeissaomnaita

4' et"
-^^
^''

"''"

'^

51

mol.etta

> V| t^ ^mekkeitta ^ mekkeissamnaita

7j|

4 ^^

'^ 5J

^
V)

^1

mekessamnaita

'^ 5! >* -i- ^1

mekessaomnaita

'-

"^

^4
oatta

JL794
okeitta

^ ^- 4 -^^^^)4
oassamnaita
okcissamnaita

^^ ^^"^^ ^^ ^ 4
mekkeissaomnaita

shall eat, etc.

v)

I came, etc.

oassaomnaita

J:^>*4v)'^etc*^"^""''
okeissaomnaita

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
S.INTEEEOGATIVE CONJUGATION.
official

91

Section

In addition to the Interrogative of the Pohte Conjugation ending in o

and

so,

which

is

used betv>"een equals in social and

rank, or towards

superiors, in ordinary conversation, the

for addressing questions to inferiors,

Corean verb possesses a separate conjugation

which

tenya for the final ta of the present, past

is formed by substituting nanya or and future tenses of the Ordinary

Conjugation.
generally
is
;

The

suffix

whereas the form in tenya

for
;

nanya may be considered the regular interrogative available is specially employed where the enquiry
Further,
is

made regarding

action not immediately under the eye of the speaker.

ha-tenya,

example, has not a Present tense meaning but

for

properly an

Imperfect

hananya, being the interrogative

time strictly present.

Again,

hayettenya refers to a past even further remote than the form hayennanya.
hakeittenya, the Future, the enquiry contains an appeal for the

In

opinion of the
reference

person addressed, and that particularly where the enquiry

is

made with

to a third party not present to the speakers; hakeintianya

on tha other hand

governing

refers to the future merely.

Such

at least are the leading principles

the application and use of the two interrogative suffixes.

hananya

do

make ?

dost thou
etc.

make

etc.

hayennanya
hakeinnanya

have I made?
will T

make ?

etc.

"t ^1 *t

hatenya
hayettenya
hakeittenya

was

making?

etc.

did I

make ?

etc.

shall I

make ?

etc.

kananya

do

go

dost thou go ? does he go ? etc.

etc.

kannanya

have I gone?
will I

Mi

kakeinnanya
katenya
kattenya

go?

etc.

was

I going? etc.

did I

go?

etc.

kakeittenya

shall I

go?

etc.

9-2

COKEAN MANUAL.
1=

-IV


CONJUGATION OF \^RBS.
?_
93

J?_
"h!"

yi

^ ^
-^

^r
\

moronanya
mollannanya
inorokeinnanys

know

I not ? etc.
etc,

have I not known ?

will I not

3JjlL

^
,S.

^ ^
I

know?

etc.

^ ^
f

morotenya
mollatteDya

was

I not

knowing

? etc.

H.
'-J-

>4

knew

I not ? etc.

'^

>[;

'^

morokeittenya

shall I not

know?

etc.

ponanya

do I see?

etc.

poannanya
pokeinnanya
potenya
poattenya
pokeittenya

have I seen

? etc.

will I see ? etc.

was

I seeing? etc.

did I see ? etc.

shall I see? etc.

Sbction a. conjunction

CONJUGATION.

Under
suffixes,

this

conjugation are included the various agglutinations and

which are employed to express condition, time, reason, conjunctions copulative and disjunctive and even punctuation. But inasmuch as the presentation of a complete paradigm of these varying modifications with all their niceties of distinction would necessitate a volume to itself and only encumber and perplex

the

student,

it

has been

considered advisable
at least as occur

to

give

here

only the

more
collo-

important modifications
quial.

such

most frequently in current

will

These embody the leading principles governing this verb inflexion and enable the student to work out, as he becomes more and more familiarized
the system of word-building and
aggutination peculiar to

with the language,

Corean.

Many

of the particles used in connecting

sentences

subordinate
It
full

and

co-ordinate

are

meaningless in themselves but are required for euphony, either

replacing our English conjuctions or merely indicating the punctuation.

may

be well said indeed that a mastery of the Corean verb implies a

of the

knowledge

Corean language.
24


94

COEEAN MANUAL.

I.

CONDITIONAL
"if"
in

SUFFIXB8.

Tho

suffixes X3^

myen and "H .5^ keteun express condition with a

connecting
a

force

corresponding to our

word

subordinate clause with the

principal clause of a sentence.

Myen, with or without the conjugation tiL o|

is

manil, can be used generally, but where the idea of uncertainty or of time

connoted and especially where the

principal

and subordinate clauses contain

the
suffix

different subjects to their respective predicates, keteun is

employed.
of the

The

present tense

is

formed by substituting myen for the

final

Future Relatire Participle, thus

hata, I

make

t
hal {Fut. Part)
.

T
{Fut Part).

"?!
if

hamyen,

I make.

4
pota, I see

pol

pomyen,

if

I see.

mekta, I eat

mekeul {Fut Part), mekeumyen,

if

I eat.

The

other tenses are formed from the Ordinary Conjugation by substituting

simyen, keteun and temyen for the ordinary

future, imperfect and pluperfect tenses.

terminations

of

the present, past,

Present

hamyen
haketeun

If I

make, if thou makest, make, if we make, etc.

if

he

Past

f 5^ ^1 "d
-5^

hayessimyen
hayetketeun

L^
j
j

^^^^^ ^^^

-J

xZ_

Future

'^

^
Imperfect
Pluperfect

^
-ji

-^1 "Jl^akeissimyen^j^

j ^^^^jj

^^^^j.^.^

^tc.

-^ hakeitketeun

"St

'd
6:^

hatemyen

If I

was making,
had made,

etc

pi td hayettemyen

If I

etc.

CONJUGATION OF VEKBS.

95

Present
>i

-Jx*

ti
-t)

}If I came, etc.

A
ZZ
5m.

-^

oketeun

Past

51.^1
}

^
^1

oassimyen
oatketeun

\l

yif I come, etc.

"T"

-^

Future
>

JJL

^
:^

Da okeissimyen
If I shall

^
^
tJJ

come,

etc.

^okeitketeun
otemyen
oattemyen
If I
If I

Imperfect
Pluperfect

"Cl "l^

was coming,
had come,

etc.

5l '^

^
^
l

etc.

Present
>

^t^

mekeumyen
mekketeun

L^
)

j ^^^^ ^^^_

pj J
Past
>>

mekessimyen 5J ^1 ^ ^ ^ meketketeun |0 ^
13? 7?]
7?l

U^
)

j ^^^^ ^^^^

Future
ji

Imperfect
Pluperfect

^ ^

>i

Xl Q^
r

mekkeissimyen
mekkeitketeun

ll

'7^

llf I shall eat, etc

"Ol

mektemyen

If I
If I

was

eating, etc.
etc.

t^ 64 -^ a^ mekettemyen
\^
ijf

had eaten,

Present

13a

pomyen
.If I

see, etc.

^
^1

J^

poketeun

Past

JL ^>^] '^ poassimyen

o

|j^
J

^ ^^^^

^^^^

tS poatketeun
pokeissimyen

Future
>>

JL ^

^ ^] ^
^1 -J
13^

| j^
J

^^^^j^ ^^^^

^^^

tS pokeitketeun

Imperfect
Pluperfect

^^
^

potemyen

If I
If I

was

seeing, etc.
etc.

61. X?|

poattemyen

had seen,

9G

COKEAN MANUAL.

EXEKCISE XXII.

%
il

^k
dial well

^1^
hamyen if you make

S3'angkeup choukeitta gratuity work I will give If you do the work well I will give you a gratuity.

pohaing koun
courier

oketeun
if

come

naikei to me
at once

cheuksi

mal

hayera

Let me know

when

instantly speech the courier comes.

make

t
tarn

r>

^^^1-^
--t

^^)
tasi

mounhechyessimyen
if fell

44
ssara build

wall

into ruins
if it

again

Build up the wall again

has fallen down.

^
nenan as for you
keu

"^

mekkeissimyen yak chyok'eitta if you will eat it will be good that medicine You will do right to take that medicine

^^W

S^)'^

ch'aik

pokeitketeun

this

if you book Should you see

will see

kachye-kakera taken-go this book you can take it away.

naika
I

keu
.

killo

otemyen

if was coming by road that If I came by that road I would have

mannatkeisso * would have met

met him.

7.

:x
keu
that

^}
If I

sarameul

poattemyen chouetkeisso * ton man if I had seen would have given money had seen the man I would have given him the money.

* Future Perfect tense. The construction and meaning of form arc explained in a separate section on a subsequent page.

this

tense


CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.
II.

9T

CAUSAL

SUFFIXES.

As, since, because,

etc. are

rendered by the suffixes Vl ni, Vj

suffix ni

yn,
(1)

nihJca,

Vl
is

771* "CI

^^

nikJcanteuro.

The

has two distinct uses

First,

it

used as a purely causal conjunction, connecting the parts of a sentence which

effect.

stand to one another in the relation of cause and

it is

restricted to the regular tenses, present, past

and

fature.

Under such conditions The two encHtic

particles

of

kka and khanteuro are frequently found added to ni both for purposes euphony and especially for the purpose of emphasizing its causal force, when

At the same time 7ii and its enclitics also appear in phrases where their meaning and application may best be indicated by punctuation marks in English and where the relation of cause and effect between different parts of the sentence can be clearly understood without being particularized by any conjunction.
connecting the subordinate with the principal part of a sentence.

keul
letters

chal well
is

As he

koake hakeisso examination will make a good scholar, he will get his degree.
hani
as he

makes

^^]
echyei yesterday

y}^
kasye having gone

J.^
onal

jtH
oni
as I

pounchyou
I

14
busy.

jL-t
hao
busy

today

come
;

am

Gone

yesterday, here today

am

%t>]
nari

^\^:^}
ch'anikka
as is cold I cannot go,
it

5
mot
not
is

7}
chilly.

J.

day

kao go

moksyou

onikka

11

toikeitta

work will become carpenter as is coming As the carpenter is coming, the work will be done.

param wind

pounikkanteuro as is blowing

silkoa
fruit

tterechyesso

has fallen

The
(2)

fruit fell

down with

the wind.

The

suffix

7ii,

as found in the agglutination teni, has a purely disjunctive in the

force.

It indicates a

break
it

sequence

of the

ideas

of the speaker of

something unexpected, as

were

which

can be best rendered by means

an adversative conjunction such as but. The agglutination teni occurs in the Imperfect, the Pluperfect and the Past Intentional {was about to do) tenses.
25

98

COKEAN MANUAL,

^^1
chyenei
before

^^^
chyangsa
trade

^^^
hateni

>^)9sipang

nongsa
he farms
is

hao

He

he was making was once a merchant but

now now he

a farmer.

onal

today

I I

iri issesye okeitteni mot work was about to come having been not was coming today but was detained on business.

oasso
I

come

hani
hayessini
hakeissini

make, so

...

etc.

I have

made, so

...

etc.

I will make, bo

...

etc.

hateni
hayetteni
hakeitteni

was making, but

...

...

etc.

I had made, but

etc.

I was about to make, but

I come, so
I come, so

...

etc.

oni
oassini
okeissini

...

etc.

...

etc.

I will come, so

...

etc.

oteni

was coming, but

...

...

etc.

oatteni
okeitteni

I had come, but

etc.

I was abou-t to come, but I go, so

...

...

etc.

kani
kassini
kakeissini

etc.

I went, so

...

etc.

I will go, 80

...

etc.

kateni
katteni
kakeitteni

was going, but

...

etc.

I had gone, but

...

etc.

I was about to go, but

...

etc.

CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.

99

100

COEEAN MANUAL.
EXEBCISE XXIII

(cojitinued).

chim
load

ta
all

kachye-oatteni

toro

ta
all

He

taken-came back all brought all the baggage but he took it

kachye-kasso taken-gone

away

again.

mourei
in water

ppachye
fallen
fell

He

chonkkeitteni ettensarami kenchyesso some-body he was about to die saved into the water but somebody saved him from drowning.

ni.

ADVERSATIVE
is

SUFFIXES.

The suffix

OL

^ vianan

the regular adversative conjunction corres-

ponding to the English

huty yet, etc.,

and

is

added as an agglutinative particle

in chi,

to the regular tenses, present, past

and

future, of the Ordinary Conjugation without

any modification or euphonic change.

the
substitution of clii for the final
ta

The conjugation ending

of the Ordinary
is

formed by
is

Conjugation,

very
;

commonly used where

and
chi
to this chi

respect or courtesy

intended towards superiors or equals

added,
to

the suffix

manan

is

regularly

express a disjunctive
the

'break in the sentence.

is

At the same

time

this

form

of

conjugation in

likewise used to convey the idea of uncertamty or doubt together with

a sense of deliberation on the part of the speaker. The forms hata-manan, etc. {i. e. the conjugation in ta), are properly confined to addressing one's inferiors in

rank.

These conjugations are regular and simple, and present no

difi&culty to the student as regards either their acquisition or explanation.

In using manan as an adversative

frequently requires that the verbal

suffix to

noun

of this

any verb, Corean syntax same verb in the oppositive

case

immediately precede the verb with the adversative suffix, thereby emphasizing and helping out the meaning. At times a certain restrictive sense is
shall
this construction corresponding

conveyed by

more

or less to the English phrases

" etc. This idiom constantly occurs in "of course," "somewhat," "I allow, other various suffixes such as to, tax, kenioa, etc., with colloquial, Corean

attached to the
verbal

noun

(in

and forms one of the principal uses for which the the oppositive case) appears in the Corean language.
predicate,

Further,

manan

is

employed as a disjunctive agglutination, with the verb

its

in the Polite Conjugation, being merely added as a suffix to

endings in

o.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
hata-manan
'I

101

make, but

...

etc.

hachi-manan

hayetta-maman
hayetchi-manan
hakeitta-manan hakeitchi-manan
I

made, but

...

etc.

I shall make, but

...

etc.

onta-manan
ochi-manan
oatta-manan

I come, but

...

etc.

I came, but

...

etc.

oatchi-manan
okeitta-manan

I
okeitchi-manan

will

come, but

...

etc.

ponta-manan I,
pochi-majian
see,

but

etc.

poatta-manan
I saw, but
...

etc.

poatchi-manan
pokeitta-manan
I shall see, but
etc.

pokeitchi-maiian
J

meknanta-manan
mekchi-manan
meketta-manan
meketchi-manan
mekkeitta-manan

I eat,

but

...

etc.

ate,

but

...

etc.

.1 shall eat,

but

etc.

^ ^

mekkeitchi-manan

102

CORE AN MANUAL.

Exercise XXIY.

echei

yesterday

oatchi-manan I came-but
I

taikeul (you) sir

mot
not

poasso

saw

came yesterday but

I did not see you.

^^
onal

^1^ 4^ kanta-manan
I go-but I

pf
pika

-I

-t^
hata

ol-teut

today

am

rain coming-likely going today but it looks like rain.

makes

3.
i

ton

choukeitta-manan
I will give-but I will give you this

houei
after

ettek'ei

this

money

how
will

money but how

>t]

kapkeinnanya will repay you repay me.

4.

*]=

ol^l
manhi

5J

u^^

J^^
am no

yak medicine

meketchi-manan

6) hyohemi
better.

c^^
is

I have eaten-but I have taken ever so much medicine but

many

advantage

epso not

alki-nan knowing-as-for

p'oulkinan eryepta anta-manan explanation-as-for it is difficult I know-but I understand the meaning but it is difficult to explain.

' y}

y]^y}t ^1

f ii

^^1

^i >d^1 j^ 5.

cf

morokeitta kal-nenchi kakeitchi-manan enchei going-as for I will go-but when to be about to go I will not know Of course I will go but I cannot tell when I will go.
kaki-nan

natki-nan recovery-as for

I

natta-manan

acho

natchi

mot

hata

am

entirely to recover not I recover- but I somewhat better in health but I cannot recover entirely.

make

8.

J.
keu
that

^J;
k'al

4t 7]

fe:

^^}^

^^

0^

chal an sseunta-manan sseuki-nan well not I use-but using-as for knife I can use the knife of course but it is not at all sharp.

^^
teulta

enter

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
IV.

103

CONCESSIVE

SUFFIXES.

Though,

although,

etc.

are rendered

by the

suffixes

vL;2a,

cl

tai,

S^to,y^ VJ $JLke7iioa With na and tai the present

substituting
si,

and^l '^ ^chirato.

tense
is

formed by substituting these

suffixes for

final of the future relative participle.

The

past and future tenses are formed by

as a euphonic connecting parciciple, for ta final of these tenses

in the Ordinary Conjugation

and then adding

the present tense,

?ia

or tai as the case

may

be.

In the case of
concessive suffix to the

to,

is

invariably formed by adding the

participle,
i.

first

form of the verbal

e.

the form without

substituted

the euphonic

ending in

sye.

For the past and future

tenses, se is

for ta final of these tenses in the Ordinary Conjugation

and then

to is

appended

as the conjunctional agglutination.

With
entirely

kenioa, the present and past tenses are formed

suffix for the final ta of the

Ordinary Conjugation.

But

for

by substituting the the future tense an

is
J)

new form

is constructed.
{iiye

The

final

of the futm-e relative participle

is

modified into rye

where the verbal stem

distinguished by
likewise

signifying

''about to," ''intending to," etc., while kenioa

nioa, so that

is

modified and becomes

we

get the termination ryenioa or nyenioa.

at times practically
to
is

The suffixes na, tai and to are meaning and use; but while tai and
equivalent to though, although,
etc.,

interchangeable in

are

strong concessive
to

conjunctions
represent

na

frequently found

fairly
tell,"

our English "whether" and that especially with such verbs as "to

"to know,"

and "to

see," etc.

Kenioa

is

concessive as regards the subordinate clause, being

equivalent to

"admitting that,"
it

"allowing

that,"

"even though,"

etc.,

but in

introducing the principal clause

marks a break in the sequence of ideas correspondinterroga-

ing to yet,

still,

or hut, etc., the principal clause being generally in the

tive or imperative

mood.
to,

Kenioa may well be translated "notwithstanding"

case
are

With

tai,

and kenioa, the verbal substantive in the oppositive

is constantly found associated, preceding the verb to which these suffixes attached. It is an idiomatic construction peculiar to the Corean language

but

extremely useful in helping out the meaning of the sentence, emphasizing

and

Thus kakinan kato, "as for going modifying the action of the predicate. though I go" meaning "even tJwiigh I go, of course, or "admitting that I go,"
,

etc.

The
ciples

suffix chirato is confined to the future

and pluperfect

relative

parti-

and followed respectively by the future and future perfect

in the principal

clause.

104

COEEAN MANUAL.

liana

hatai

hayeto

hakenioa
etc.

Though

make,

hayerfsiiia

hayessitai

hayesseto
etc.

hayetkenioa

Though I made,

hakeissina

hakeissitai

Though
"9 J^l
ijl Si.

hakeisseto I shall make, etc.

haryenioa
I I

halchirato
haj'essilchirato

Though

may make,
had made,

etc.

t ^ ^a ^1 ^ S

Though

etc.

^f^

CONJUGATION OF VEKBS.

105

^Av^
chapeuua
chapassina

^}<\
chapeutai

^j-oj-S
chapato
I take, etc.

^J-7|v]4
chapkenioa

Though

chapassitai

chapasseto
I took, etc.

chapatkenioa

Though

4^2^)1^ ^^^A^]<\ ^J-^HS ^j-A3lv|4

chapkeissina
chapkeissitai

chapkeisseto
I shall take, etc.

chapeuryenioa

Though

>^
'm'

^ j jt ^ ^1 ^ Sa"

^1

chapeulchirato
chapassilchirato

Though

may

take, etc.

Though

I had taken, etc.

5!

A H-

5!

'J]

^, *^ 5:
eteto

5! 7] v^
etkenioa

eteuna

eteutai

Though

I get, etc.

5I5J/^IHetessina

5!5!^H1
etessitai

5!

Though

^^:^K
etkeissina

5!^/^l'^l
etkeissitai

4 ^^^1S 5!a^H4
51^1-^

v] 5J t]

etesseto

etetkenioa

I got, etc.

etkeisseti)

etauryenioa

Though

I shall get, etc.

^
j1

'S-

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ .
^1
satai

eteulchirato
etessilchirato

Though

I
I

may
had

get, etc.

Though

got, etc.

Sana

Though

sarato I live, etc.

salkenioa

^i^A]x^ ^i^A]^] ^i^^^Si

Barassina
sarassitai

^151-7]

sarasseto
I
lived, etc.

saratkenioa

H4

Though

^^^^IMsalkeissina

>^^a^l'^]
salkeissitai

^^^^15: ^^v^H^
salkeisseto I shall live, etc.

sallyenioa

Though
'^d
I

J5c

salchirato

Though
Though

1
I

may

live, etc-

^^

^^
27

-^1

^.ii.

sarassilchirato

had hved,

etc.

106

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise

XXV.
-f^ hana
^y}
rika
profit

'^^^^
chyangsanan
as for trade

^^^^]
pouchareni
diligently

^^
is

Though
2.

I make I attend well to business, I never

though

epso not

make any

profit.

JLI

CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.
V.
Whether,

107

DELIBERATIVE
or, etc. are

AND ALTEEXATIVE SUFFIXES.

VL7^a,

rendered by the suffixes

y^

V\^Jce7ia,

yV

nanha,
{a)

}^ ^1

nanchi, Cq >^i te7ichi,jM chi, and v^

^j

jienchi.

Na and ^g?i3^.

The

suffix na, in addition to its

use as a concessive

conjunction (though), has

alternatives, especially
tion.

an alHed meaning {whether), when employed to mark

is

where the verb

be evolved

repeated or otherwise placed in opposi-

Under these
...

conditions the original force of na as a concessive conjunc;

tion {though) can

still

but the use of the alternatives whether and

whether

or,

more

correctly conveys the sense of the Corean idiom in this

is

connection.

This conjugation

simply

formed by the substitution of

7ia

for

the final

ta of the Present, Past and Future tenses of the Ordinary Conjugation.

From
tion of

the Future Relative Participle (ending in

sal, eul, etc.) of certain

verbs, yet another "alternative" tense, ending in

na

is

derived,

by the substitu-

na for the

final

of the participle.

This appears constantly in the language,

being well suited to the euphonic requirements of Corean speech. It is restricted to the present tense and, as a strong alternative, has the same force as the
termination in kena.

This form in
ordinary conversation.
recourse
is

ite^ia

appears only in the Present and Psist tenses.

...

It has

a strong "alternative" sense (whether

or),

and

is

much used by Coreans

is

in

Where however

the idea of future action

understood,

had

to the gerundive ending in rye, etc., the verb ^a^o. being utilized

and becoming hakena for the Future simple and hayetkena for Thus kal, the Future Eelative Participle of kanta, I go), Future Perfect. and we thus get haryebecomes karye, (about to go or intending to go) though go I will to intend go, etc). I hakena (though
as an auxiliary
;

^4

10

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

109

EXEBCISE XXVI

{continued).

ona kana il pan io sort is whether he comes whether he goes one It is all the same whether he comes or goes.

chyekeuna match'ihankachi k'euna kapseun whether small as for price much the same whether large Large or small, the price is much the same.

v|.

6). v)

^i\

7>

-f

e| ^- 6).

?f

ani oanna ka oanna whether he has come not whether he has come having gone Go and ascertain whether he has come or

moure-poara.
enquire-Ee*^

not.

6.

pai ship

enchei

when

Go

ttenakeinna ka al-ko will depart go know-and and find out when the ship will sail,

onera

come

7.

a
keu
that

%
il

V)

0^

^
ta

5| /J! vf
toikeinna
v, ill

^
mot

5|^vf.
toikeinna
will

nai-il

work

tomorrow all "Will that work be

become not finished tomorrow or not.

become

8.

-f 7^

^ 7] |

^J 7|

j]

-f jt.
hao

hakena whether you do

malkena saingkak whether you don't thought Please yourself whether you do

tairo

according to
this or not.

make

chonkkena
whetlier he dies

salken

I
28

whether he lives Leave him alone

naiye parye having thrown

to live or die.

touera
awaj''

put

110

COEEAN MANUAL.
(6)

Nanka,nancJii,

tenclii,

cJii

and nenchi.
...

These

five suffixes are also

employed to express whether and whether

or,

but under distinct conditions.

expressed or
understood,

Nanka

is

confined to verbs of "enquiry" etc,

latter case it

either

and in the

has the force of an interrogative, indicating doubt, hesitation

or deliberation on the part of the speaker.

The

various sufl&xes
(I

ending in
not).

chi

appear chiefly in connection with the verb vioronta

know

But the

ending in nanchi can also be utilized as an interrogative of doubt or hesitation Tenchi, in addition to its use in informal conversation with equals or inferiors.
in connection with verbs, appears frequently as a sufSx joined to
in opposition to one another.
It
is

nouns placed

connected

with

the noun by the uniper-

sonal verb ilta

(is)

sense of whether
Participle in
into
71
I,

and corresponds to our English sufiix ever, but with the additional or. Chi and nenchi appear only suffixed to the Future Relative Corean euphony requiring that the initial t of tenchi should pass
...

(0 in order to coalesce
is

with the

final of this participle

is

form.

SiUenchi,

as in hayessiUe7ichi,

an ever recurring form in Corean, and

tense of the Ordinary Conjugation.

found substituted

for ta final of the past

It has a dubitative

meaning

at times, equivalent to

whether I would have,

etc,

and by some has accordit is

;

ingly been termed a Future Perfect.

With

the intricacies and anomalies of Corean colloquial,

practically

impossible to lay

down hard

rules to explain idiomatic construction

it is

but with the

leading principles here enunciated,

hoped that the student may

at least obtain

a clue

amid the vagaries and

perplexities of the language.

^^^}

Whether
,,

make,
etc.

etc.

made,

,,

I will

make,

etc.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

Ill

^^y}

112

COEEAN MANUAL.

toinanka

Whether
,,

I become, etc.

toiyennanka
toikeinnanka

I became, etc

I shall become, etc.

toinanchi

Whether

I become, etc.
etc.

toiyennanchi

I became,

toitenchi

Whether I become,
I had become,

etc.

toiyettenchi

etc.

toilchi

Whether
toillenchi

I shall become, etc,

toiyessillenchi

,,

I have become,

etc.

kapnanka

Whether

I pay, etc.
etc.

kaphannanka

I paid,
,,

7)

Til

{r

^V

kapkeinnanka

I shall pay, etc.

kapnanchi

Whether
,,

I pay, etc.

kaphannanchi

I paid, etc.

kaptenchi
kaphattenchi
kapheulchi

Whether
,,

I pay, etc.

I had paid, etc.

Whether
kapheuUencbi
kaphassillenchi
,,

I shall pay, etc.

have paid,

etc.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

113

^ ^ ^ ^
T^
7?|

yX
\^

meknanka

Whether

I eat, etc. I ate, etc. I shall eat, etc.

^r

mekennanka
mekkeinnanka
meknanchi

}C "^H
>!t|

^
1^ 1^

JC

Whether

I eat, etc.

^ ^
^
>^|

^j

mekennanchi
mektenchi
mekettenchi

I ate, etc.

Whether

I eat, etc. I

had eaten,

etc.

mekeulchi
/"Whether I shall
raekeullenchi
)

eat, etc.

oj 6^ >y V^

yl|

mekessillenchi

,,

I have eaten, etc.

Exercise XXVTI.
mokoun-teul
cooUe's

moure-po hananka am hananka enqmre-see not whether make whether make Ascertain whether the coohes are working or not.
ireul

work

p'yenchi
letter

oannanka whether has come Go now and see

chikeum

ka

poara
see

if

go the letters are come.

now

pai

enchei

boat

when

ttenakeinnanka whether will depart

Please find out

chom
httle

ara

posio
see please

know

when

the boat will leave.

patkeui outside

nouka

who
There
is

cheunnanta kai oannanchi barks dog whether came barking. is dog the outside somebody

keu
that
29

saram

etten-saram-incbi

man
Do

what-man-Hoever you know who that

man

as for is?

nenan you

ananya do you know ?

114

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise XXYIII.

keu
that

saram

chipei

innanchi

emnanchi

ananya
?

whether is at house man whether not is do you know Do you know whether that man is at home or not ?
i|
ttai

6)
i

n^]
kkachi
until I do not know

^j /^l
chipei in house

5l i ^1
innanchi

JL 5.
yet.

?II

-fc

this

time

whether is whether he is at home as

morokeisso I will not know

3.

pohaingkoun
courier

ani kannanchi kannanchi al sou epso not whether has gone know means are not whether has gone I cannot tell whether the courier has gone or not.

4.$!
pit

7)ta>]
kaptenchi

*^H
ani

debt

syangkoan whether pay as for you concern not whether pay It is no business of yours whether he pays or not.

^M^] ^51 nenan

kaptenchi

44

f4 mara
avoid

choukettenchi

sarattenchi

chapa
seize
alive.
'

onera

whether he died

whether he lived Apprehend him dead or

come

'

j.%
onal

-
ton

^^1
choulchi

*fH ani

-f^y
choulchi

'^K^
?

today

money whether will give not Do you know whether he will

ananya do you know give the money today?

whether
will give

7.

^ld^1
kallenchi

*i

^M^]
kallenchi

whether

I will

an whether I will go decide go not It has not as yet been decided whether I go or not.
achik as yet

*H

^3^ ^'i chakchyeng

epso not is

ta
all

toiyessillenchi

whether has become I cannot exactly tell whether

chasyeihi accurately
it

morokeisso

I will not know has been finished or not.

CONJUGATION OF VEKBS.

115

Exercise XXIX.

nai kyeikoanchi cboutenchi an syoul-kap choutenchi I to concern wine-price whether give not whether give I don't care whether he gives a gratuity or not.

ani

hao

not

make

2.

t J. *^
manheuna

innan-tairo chyekeuna being-according to whether few whether many Whether few or many, use what you have.

^ A^

5l ol

'J]

5:

4i e^ife
sseukeisso will use

kina

whether long

ta kachye-onera chareuna all bring-come whether short Bring them all whether long or short.

toungkoulkena whether round

It will

monakena sseuki-nan match'ankachi whether square as for using much the same do equally well whether round or square.

5.

kem-tenchi black-whether

heui-tenchi

kapsi
is

ban
one
the same.

kachio
sort is

white-whether price Whether black or white the price

6|e^
iri

^vf

t^^

-fv^

here
It

hana chyeri ban a il pan though make there though make one sort is all the same whether you do it this way or that way.

6)
io
is

J.

7.

pis-ssatenchi

whether dear

nouktenchi cbikeumeun ton epsye mot whether cheap now as for money not being not Whether dear or cheap, I have no money and cannot buy it.

sao

buy

encbei

katenchi

keu
that

ttai

when

whether go

time

pout'akhakeisso I will appeal

is

I will appeal to

him whenever he

going.

116

COREAN MANUAL.
VI.

RESTRICTIVE
in

CONDITIONAL SUFFIX.
first

The
Participle

suffix

ya occurs
i.e.

connection with the

form of the Perfect

...

and produces a sense corresponding to if only,

clause.

unless, only after

must, not unless, etc.

a restrictive conditional in the Present Tense followed

by the Future in the principal

ting se-ya for ta

Future Perfect in
its

The Past Tense is formed by substituit must be followed by the final in the Ordinary Conjugation the principal clause. The Future is similarly formed by substitu; ;

ting se-ya for ta final of the Future of the Ordinary Conjugation

but in Corean

place

is

generally taken by the present in ya, which as a Conditional Present

naturally implies

a contingent

future

sufficiently at least to

meet the

require-

ments

of a Future Tense in Corean.

-g-

6^ 61

CONJUGATION OF \^RBS.
Xrl

117

5J

61; 6fc

mekeya
mekesseya
mekkeisseya

If I only eat, etc.

^ ^ Xt
Hi
7|| >^"l

If I only ate, etc. If I only will eat, etc.

^p

.^T

6u 6t

chapaya
chapasseya
chapkeisseya

If I only take, etc.

>^ ^-^1 ^F
-^r
7|| >^"|

If I only took, etc.

If I only will take,

^p

et<!.

-^

6i 91

6t
"^1

choneya

If I only give, etc. If I only gave, etc. If I only will give, etc.

-^

^p
^'p

chouesseya
choukeisseya

'^
j

Exercise
JL
^4=

XXX.
vj
7l[

natkeisso keu will recover if only eat that If you only take that medicine, you will recover.

yak medicine

6^ 6): mekeya

moksyouka

oaya

iri

toikeitta

will become work if only come carpenter If only the carpenter comes, the work will be finished.

miri
If

beforehand

naika katkeisso nille-chouesseya would have gone I spoken if only have given you had only told me beforehand, I would have gone.

moulken
article

syoul-kap choukeitta ch'atkeisseya I will ^ve only you will find wine-price I will give you a reward if you will only find the article.
if

30

US

COKEAN MANUAL.
EXEBCISE XXX
{contiimed)

taiki

poulkapoul
necessity

you

(sir)

yekeui here
sir,

You must

be here,

if

hai-sou patkeui only be resource beyond there is no other resource,

isseya

is

epso not

kekeuireui keu ttai there (ace case) that time

:

kassej^a
if

kcu

sarameul

only had gone that

man
Ji<^l-*|:

mannatkeisso would have met

there then.

You would have met him had you only gone

'

^^\
p'yenchi

-t^d^l

7)^51

kitarye poaya oUenchi alkeisso letter whether will come having waited if only see will know If he will only wait and tee, ha will know if the letter will come.

"k^^
alkeisso
will
all

cLnn
load
If

ta
all

oassillenchi
will

whether has come you only go and see, you

ka go

poaya
if
if

only see

know

know

the baggage has

come.

VII.

TEMPORAL

SUFFIXE3

The two
or while,

suffixes

X^ 7r taha

and O^

/^

myensye express time, whe7i

but with this difference, that the former implies interrux)ted or unexpectand the
latter

ed

action,

simultaneous action, more or less continuous between

the predicates of the different clauses of the sentence.

Taha

is

united with the

Present and
tion
;

Past Tenses by substitution for ta final of the Ordinary

is

Conjuga-

myensye

united with the Present Tense only.

myensye, the gerundive in

ciple) is

For the Future with taka or rye or rya (derived from the Future Eelative Parti(I do),

employed, especially in conjunction with the auxiliary verb hata

-wtions

thus producing the termi

rye-hataJca and rye-hamyensye,oiien contracted

into rya-taka and rya-mye7isyc, yvhere hataka and hamyejisye are strictly Present

Tenses regularly formed from hata, and attached

be conjugated.

to the

gerundive of the verb to

As regards the meaning of these two agglutinations taka and myensye, Coreans use them very loosely and irregularly in ordinary colloquial apparently more for euphony than as a definite grammatical construction expressive of time.

Accordingly hut will frequently be found

thereby

to give a correct
action,

rendering

of

taka,
the

implying interrupted or unexpected

rule, gives

while

and

will

give

nearest approach to myseyisye in conveying the idea of simultaneous action.

The

English participle, as a general

tive

an exact rendering of these agglutina-

forms especially as regards

time or tense, which depends on the time or

tanse of the predicate of the principal clause.

CONJUGATION OF VEKBS.
Other temporal
suffixes are

119

composed of the

locative case of such

o'f

words as

^1

^ ^

^^^-

suffixed to the

Future Relative Participle

the verb, as de-

scribed on a subsequent page.

t^7

120

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1.

XXXL
s^4l
tochekeul

^^
aeuikol

:5,ft:}7|kattaka

-i^^
mannasso

eountry

When

thieves I met going to the country I was attacked by thieves.

I

when

went

syeoul
capital It came

when

kataka I go

pireul rain

mannasso I met
to Soul.

on to rain when I was going

Syeoul
capital

kamyensye

pireul

machyetta

rain while I go flogged It was raining while I went to Soul.

seuikol

kattaka

yere

nal

manei

toraoasso

country
I

when
went

period several days I returned I went to the country but returned after several days.

iri issesye mot karyetaka chipei work been not I intend to go to house I intended going home but was detained by business.

kasso
I

went

6.

5.^44
tochekchil stealing action

-f^^lHe

chaphiye hataka taken while he makes was caught stealing and killed.

^^H
toraka return

f53^
choukesso he died

7.

j^/^l

-gj

A
when

5J:T^ 7f
poattaka
yoii

i 47f
clearly go

^
mal

t^

sf

chasyeihi accurately

hayera

have seen
(this)

When
8.

you have seen

make speech back and tell him.

ton

money

nasso nanpong arose spend thrift I gavo him the loan of the money but never got repaid.

kkouiye
lent

when

chouettaka I gave

CONJUGATION OF VEKBS.

1-21

Exercise XXXII.

ch'aik

potaka

nat

houei

book

after noon Let us read the book now but go out

I see

when

let

nakapsyeita us go out

in the afternoon.

keu
that

ttai

time

momi apha mot oryetaka sore not while I intend to come body I was coming then but was ill and could not come.

oasso

came

s.

chikeum

now

karyemyensye taikeui chom porye-hao while he intends to go little you (sir) he intends to see He intends to go now and wants to see you a little.

keu
that

killo

kamyensye
while I go

keu

moulken
article

by road

that I will buy that article as I

am

sakeitta I will buy going that way.

^
pyet sunshine
0.
yjit

namyensye

'l^^

>^l/f
pika
is

^"^
onta

while proceeds rain It rains while the sun

comes
shining.

kapheuryemyensye
while you intend to pay

ouei

ton

debt

why money

Why
7.

do you spend money in that way

sseunanya thus do you use ? if you intend to pay your debts ?

keurek'ei

ouri

kamyensye
while go Let us chat together as

we

hapsyeita niaki let us make story we are going along.

8.

keu

yak

mekeumyensye

kot

pyengi

te

directly sickness more that medicine while he eats Directly he took that medicine he got worse.

hayesso has made

SI

122

COKE AN MANUAL.
VIII.

SUFFIX
^l-A;^,

U?;ED

WITH VERBS OF FEARINO, ETC,

occurs

The

suffix

added to the Future Eelative Participle,

regularly in connection with verbs expressive of "'fear", like

or with nounrf expressive of "anxiety" like nyemmje, or Jcekchyeng.

mousy epta and touryepta, Its meaning

and use approach nearest to our English conjunction

"lest".

Exercise
1.

XXXTIL
^v^
nyemnye
anxiety
rain tomorrow.

v]

6^

^]

7f

4^).
olka

5)JL
toio

naiil

pika
rain

tomorrow

coming
it

becomes

lam
^I^lneika

anxious lose

^ ^ 5
keu
ttai

mot

-|7f
olka

kekchyeng

^^

-s^j,
hayesso

you

not coming that time anxiety I made I was anxious lest you could not come then.

keu
that

aheui
child

mourei

ppachilka
,

toiirycone-hao

The

in water falling afraid-makes child is afraid of falling into the water.

param wind

poulka blowing I cannot

mousyeouesye

haingsven

mot

hao

being, afraid navigation not sail beintf afraid of the wind blowing.

make

FUTUBE PEBFECT TENSE.

A compound
have".
It is

tense occurs frequently in Corean which in force and use

corresponds practically to

our

English Future Perfect, "will have" or "would

suffix distinctive of the

formed by substituting the agglutinative

Jceitta (or k'eitta for

Future Tense,

aspirated verb stems) for ta final of the Past

Tense of the Ordinary Conjugation, and thus presents. a combination of the Past and Future Tenses. It takes various suffixes to express interrogation, condition, The Future Perfect Eelaetc. in common with the regular tense modifications.
tive Participle,

ending in

sil,

is

generally found joined

to choiU (the participle

;

noun ending),
verb moronta

ket, thing, etc. in

dependence on the verb alia

the termination sillenchi

(I

(vide p. 110)

(I know) while most often appears associated with the

know

not),

and

at

times has a purely Pluperfect sense:

CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.

123

'^
-

6^

7?]

"CI-

hayetkeitta

I will have done, etc.

^1

>.

hayetkeisso

f^^ I would have done, etc.

^^
-g.

-^
^1

^
>

hayetkeinnanya
hayetkeisso

"Would I have done,

etc.

^ ^

i^r will I have done, etc.

"S"

>fl

>^|

^
1-

hayetkeissini

As

would have done,

etc.

"t
_^

^
*jj

5!

5^

hayetkeittamau

^.^^j^ j^^^^ 3^_ .jc.

^ ^1

^y V*

hayetkeitchimanan

^ ^^
g-

hayessil

Would have done

Whether

{Bel: Part:)

6^

>y

V^

^1

hayessillenchi

1 would have done.

Exercise

XXXIV.
pyengi
sickness
will

yak medicine

mekettemyen
if

Had
2

nahatkeisso have recovered he taken medicine, he would have recovered.

had eaten

J.
keu
that

^j
chip

t\
ta

^]

51

^V

'f

chietkeinnanya

will have built? all house Will he have finished building the house ?

moksyou
if

all work carpenter Had the carpenter come he would have

oattemyen had come

il

ta
^

hayetkeitta
will

have made

finished the work.

chikeum

toraoatkeissini
as

elp'it

ka

poara
see

now

he

will

He

will

have returned have returned by

now

quickly go go c[uickly and see.

124

COREAN MANUAL.
EXEBCISE XXXJV
{continued).

echei

katkeitchimanan

iri

isse

mot

kasso

yesterday
1

work went would have gone but been not would have gone yesterday but was detained by business.

hoitap

oassilcboul

aiko

arapora

oasso

answer would have come know-and to ascertain came I thought the reply would have come and came to inquire.

keu
that

saram

pit

man

debt

I cannot tell

nai morokeisso kaphassillenchi will not know whether would have paid I whether he would have paid all the debt.
ta
all

to dress would have become know-and thought the clothes would have been finished and came
all

ot clothes

ta

toiyessilchoul

alko

nipeura
to

oatta

came put them

on.

GEBUNDIVE.
The Corean verb
rya
or rye.
(1)

possesses two allied Gerundives, derived from iHm Future

I

Belative Participle respectively by changing the

final into

(1)

ra or re or

(2)

The gerundive
(I go),

in ra or re appears principally in conjunction

(I

with
;

the verbs kanta

onta

come) ^onai^a

(I

send) and other verbs of motion

and indicates merely the object for which one comes or goes. With a few verbs, and especially with those marked by Zin the stem, is irregularly formed in Ine or Ina, pronounced lie or lla for tlie sake oi gerundive the
euphony.

7]"^^
/^

kachille

from

kachita

(1 fetch).

sill

sitta

(I load).

kalla

,r

kalta

(I

cultiratf).

p'alla

P'alfca

(I

sell).

CONJUGATION OF \^RBS.

125

Exercise
1.

XXXV.
ton

sai

chapeure
to seize

kasso

birds

be went

money

He

has gone shooting.

He

kapheure oasso pay he has come has come to pay the money.
to

t
k'al

-fi hana
one

^>4
sara
to
to

^^
oasso

knife

He came

buy buy a

has come
knife.

mal
horse

sak

naire

kasso

wages

Ha

has

to take out he has gone to hire a pony.

gone

taikeul

chom
little

pora
to see I
little.

oasso

you

sir

came

came

to see

you a

^^
yekeui here

^53 mouet
What

-t^f

^v^

hara oannanya what to do have you come ? have you come here to do?

ch'aik

sara
I

ponaiyesso
I sent
to

book

buy have sent

to

buy the book.

moulken
article

kacbille to fetch

ponaiyesso

he has sent
article.

He

has sent for the

yelsoi

kachille
to fetch

key

kasso has gone

He
32

has gone for the key.

126

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise

XXXYI.

chim
load

He

oasso has ooma has come for the packages.

chire to load

Bonnim

macheure

nakasso

guests to meet he has gone out He has gone out to meet the guests.

ton

money

kachille to fetch

ponaiyesso have sent

I have sent for the money.

pat

field

He

kalla kasso has gone to cultivate has gone to plough the fields.

mal
horse

He
6,

kachi-ko ssal sille take-and rice to load has come with a pony to load the

oasso

has come
rice.

seuikollo to country

k'ong beans

palla
to

buy

kasso has gone

He

has gone to the country to buy beans.

chyangei
to market

ssal rice

ton-sara

kasso

He

is

gone to

he went money-to buy the market to sell the rice.

^i
chyeoul
scales

y}^\^
He

i;d
tx)

't^
talla

kachi-ko moulken bring-and article brought the scales to weigh

^^
oasso

to

weigh

came

the articles.

to

p'alta ordinarily

means

sell

but with grain,

rice, etc. it

always meanj

buy.

CONJUGATION OF VKEBS.
(2)

127

The gerundive

in rija or rye appears in conjunction with the verb

hata

(I

make), or with the copulative ho

pendent clauses.

(and) generally connecting two indeThis gerundive always expresses intention or purpos*.

Exercise

XXXVIL
^J^j^

^7f
naika
I I

^^ ^Ma
seuikol

^e|^

am

karye-ko haingchyang ch'ario intend to go-and country baggage arrange going to the country and am arranging my baggage.

onal

today

mouet what

harye-ko intend to do-aud

for

oasso

have come
?

What
3.

have you come

today

onaremi
as for today

kongpou
study
I

chom
little

harya-ko intend to do-and

little

oasso

have come

came

to study a

today.

'd^^l
euchei

when

karye hananya to house intend to go make you ? WTien do you intend to go home?

^l^] chipei

y}^

-fy^^

echei

yesterday

Do

ch'aik porya hananya given book intend to see do you make you intend reading the book I gave you yesterday ?

chouten

this

What

mouesai sseurye-ko ket mantaresso thing intend to use-and for what have made do you intend to use this thing for that you have made?

nari

chyemoure-to
late-though

day

karya intend to go

hananya
do you make ?
late ?

Do you mean

to go

even though

it is

sarya pis-ssa-to kapsi hao intend to buy I make dear-though price I intend to buy it even though the price is dear.

128

COREAN MANUAL.
AUXILIARY VERBS.

I.

Ota,

I come,

are frequently used in conjunction with the verbal participles

of other verbs, to

Kata, I go,
meaning.

give

definiteness

and exactness to the

^^^

J2L Ci-teure-ota
^^\
na-kata

1 enter.
I go out.
I bring.

M- yr

y\yA

^Clkachye-ota

7 ' jd 7 r ^\ kachye-kata Vl ^l C^olla-kata

I take away.
I ascend.

1^
>AL

^ ^
A
^1^l*

C4-narye-ota
sa-ota
"CI-

I descend.
I

buy.

^W*

6U

chapa-kata
le-ota

I seize.

summon.

II vota, I see,

(a)

Joined to the verbal participle of another verb pota conveys

the meaning "to try," etc.

tl

d.i
\3f_

Cltara-pota
"Ci*

Hun g-see I
Eaten-see

weigh

1^ 6^
,L
'-g'

meke-pota

I taste.

^
ti
Cl-

_2-

t^ moure-pota

Enquired-see

I ask
try.

_5. "Cl haye-pota

til

Oj- ara-pota

^V^
(6)

JL

Clch'achye-pota

I Known-see enquire. Sought-see I

Made-see
I

look-for.

preceded by the enchtic particles na and nanka, (substituted for ta final of the Present, Past and

Future Tenses, Indicative,

tion)

of the Ordinary Conjuga;

pota expresses probabihty

Thus


CONJUGATION 0? VERBS.
-
139

I'll

^
S*

p JS.

^
})

ha-na

pota

probably do,

etc.

yV

w*

ha-nanka pota

or I think I do, etc.

^5
-gr

V
Jr

--*

>

hayen-na pota
'Cl hayen-nanka pota

I probably did, etc.

7l-

jL

or I think I did, etc.

"^

^
^^)

haken-na pota

1 will probably do, etc.

fe

yV _4
(c)

hakein-nanka pota

or I think I will do, etc.

With
pota
is

the Future Relative Participle followed by ka,

also used to

ity," etc. in the

"I future

convey the meaning of "probabil*

think I will,"

etc.

S.^
onal today

]
pi

-17)-

^^
Ji^

pota ol-ka rain about to come-probable I see I think it will rain today.

^
ken
that
III.

%1:
ireul
is

^]%
nai-il

ty}

hal-ka pota tomorrow about to do-probable I sea work I think 1 will do that work tomorrow.
frequently found as an auxiliary joined to the

Chouta, I give,

verbal participle of another verb as a

complement

to its meaning.

IV.

Hata, I make,

is

constantly used as an auxiliary,

and especially

with such suffixes as teut

{tat), likely,

man,

able, pen, time, etc.,

when

joined

to the Futnre Relative Participle of another verb.

S3

130

COIIEAN MANUAL.

Exercise XXXVTII.
'

^
keu
that

41
saram

man

choukeul kesal about to die thing I saved that man's

^1

y]t
Hfe,

"i^

-^5!4r

sallye-chouesso

saved life-given

iri

keupha-ni

chom

toa-chouo
assisted-give

work

The

pressing as little work is urgent, so help

me

little.

'

J.^
onal today

%^^

]4

-k^

heuryesye pika ol-teut-hata cloudy rain come-likely-makes It is cloudy today and looks like rain.

^^

4.
iri

work

toil-tat-hateni acho t'eullyesso become-likely-make-but entirely differred The affair looked like succeeding but failed entirely.

5.

syoul

wine

chyoha mekeul-man-hata good eating-able-makes The wine seems good and quite drinkable.
massi
taste

keu
that

pout

sseul-man-hata
;

sa-oner&

using-able-makes pen That pen is quite serviceable

buy-come buy it

7.

^61]
mourei in water

^\:^
ppachye
fallen into

^ 4 ^ i- ^ '^
chpukeul-pt^n-hayetta

I fell into the

dying-time-made water and was nearly drowned.

8.

chom
little

te

kitaryettemyen

if I had waited more I would have met him had

mannal-pen-hayesso meeting-time-made I waited a little more.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
NEGATION.
To express
ivords-

l.jl

negation Coreans

commonly employ one

of the

two

follov/ing

L.

6Lor

^\

Vl an or

afii,

signifying either

mere negation, or oi with the im-

plied sense of unwillingness.

[I.

JSL mot, signifying not, with, the implied sense of inabihty.

[II.

Yet a third method of expressing negation consists in dropping the final ta of the Present Indicative of the Ordinary Conjugation and adding to
the root of the verb one of the following terminations
:

(a)

^1 6L ^^or>X|becomes ^1

^c/ziawjS'a or

chant' a.

This

termination, which

6L

^4.or JcU B^.c/i'ian^'a or ch'anVa

for aspirated roots, is

properly a contraction for-^j

or^j

chi or

ch'i (the

negative

infinitive

sign)
is

combined

vidth

the words 61. V|

verbal
adjectives,

"^

"C^anihata, not make.

It

used

chiefly with

Thus

Jg.

e|.cVra,good:

ja^l

<>}^^.,uy,,j,^,^,,t^^]

,,ot
i.e.

good,
bad.

^ ^L
y^ v^ F
y

^\,

chyoch'ant'a

yy
TI

>^|

J-

"C^ kipchiant'a
kipchant'a

not deep,
i.e.

>^I- ^4

shallow,

(b)

^1
J

^^
H
'^

Cl

chi viot hata-, expressive of inabihty (cannot).

^r

c/iianiAa^a, expressive of unwilhngness (will not).

(c)

^] ^^ JL
^\ _^i >| ol

chimalko
_^^^

^
^1

^^^

expressing prohibition (do not). ^

182

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

XXXIX.
oj-v)

^
Rvoul

6].

t^

41
pyello chyoba in particular good 1 do not care

-f^
hao

an
I

mekso

am
not

wine

I drink not do not drink wine.

make
it

much

for

.)
1

^
ttai

kkachi
until

pobaingkoun
courier

ani

teure-oasso

this

time

not

entered-came

The
3.

courier has not arrived as vet.

1
syoiil

"^

I'i"
*i

5:4
chyoha good
I

mot

mekso

*H am
not

hao

wine

not I drink I cannot drink wine.

make
it.

do not care for

5V
tampai
tobacco

koiakhaye mot mekkeitta being wicked not will eat taste The tobacco is bad and I cannot smoke it.

5
7M)
ka-chi

mat

1 ^f

t"]
onal
iri

51^1^
issesye

5
mot
not

hao

today

work
I

am

having been to go busy today and cannot go.

make

pika

ol-teut-haye

ka-chi
to go

ani

hao

ram

coming-likely-made
It looks like rain

and I

will

not not go.

make

Hl^f
naika
I

^
ton

^^15:
isse-to

^^1
chou-chi

*)-H
ani

-f^
hao

having-though money Even though I have money

not to go I will not give you any.

make

6^61
naiil

m
work

tomorrow

We

will

manheu-ni neutkei many-as late be busy tomorrow so do not be

o-chi

mara
avoid

to

come

late.

CONJUGATION OF \^RBS.

133

THE DEMONSTRATIVE VERB.

The English verb "to be"
is

represented in Corean by two distinct

its

words, each with a use and meaning essentially

own.
implies "possession", and

The Corean verb ^f "Cv

corresponds to "have"; whereas

itta

(root

6|

U)

Ci-^V^a (root

6l

or

il)

has a purely

demonstrative force and appears only in the third person, singular or plural,

appended as a

suffix

or

agglutination
is

to

the
i.e.

noun

of

which
;

it

predicates.
iltci

Thus
ilta

k'al

itta

means "there
is

a knife",

"I have a knife"

but k'al
.

implies that "it

a knife'

[not

any other

article or instrument]

In short,

mav

well

be defined as the demonstrative verb.

Present, tense.
ilta

ita

rHe, she,

it

is

they are.

ira

io

He,
yo
Imperfect
tense.
iteni
ilteni
illeni

she,

it is

they are (polite form)-

He,

she,

it

was,

they were.

Interrogative.

inya
lis it? etc.

inka
s

io

}-Isit? etc (polite).

yo

^i'C^^
v^ -a v)
31

iltenya
illenva

^\N'a8 it? etc.

J

134

COEEAN MANUAL.

Conditional.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
EXERCISE XL
{continued).

185

^ ^
keu
that
cbyeii

^ ^
k'eun

''l^'^
ilteriya

shop

Was

chyen big shop that a big shop

was?
?

chyenei-uan
formerly-aB for

saram koiakhai man wicked Formerly he was a bad man

iteni

was but

chikcnm-enn now-as for

But he

is

keurechi anso * thus not is not so now.

Exercise XLI.

mareun

t4 4^
orheun
right

1mal
speech
is

*!. irato

4s.
it

as for speech

though

be

Though what you say

2.

quite correct.

ireun
as for

keurek'ei

toil

sou

work

thus
affair

becoming

means

is

epso not

The

cannot be arranged in that wav.

k'ong beans

ma
-vrhether

ssal

ina

be

rice

whether be

kapsi price

match'ankachi

much
the same.

the

same

Whether beans

or rice, the price is

much

chip

inchi

chye
that
tell

chip

inchi

morokeisso
I will not

this

house

whether be
I

cannot

house whether be which house it is.

know

Contracted for keure-chi-an-so,

the polite form

of

keure-chi-an-iia

thus not

IS.


136

COREAN MANUAL.
EXEBCISE XLI
(continued).

4a
noukou-nya
(/br-inya)
f

ch'inko
friend
it

yo
is

who

is ? is

Who
6.

there ?

It is friend.

t3

mousam
what

^i'^
kesi-o
ifor-io)
is it
"?

namou-lta

(/br-ilta)

thing

wood
It is

it is

What

is

it?

wood.

so-tenchi

ox-whethcr be

mari-tenchi toiiian tairo chapa horse-whether be becoming according to seize

onera

come

Get horses or bullocks

just

as

you can.

VERBAL NOUNS.
Verbal nouns are of two categories
(I)
:

Those derived from the verb stem by adding

love,

and

kl.

Nouns

in

are

regarded as abstract, like the English words

ki are participial, equivalent
to

play, etc,

whereas" those in

Both forms are modified for case inflexion. The noun in ki retains its use and force as a verb in governing an object, and at times it is best rendered by an infinitive,
the English loving, playing, etc.
especially with adjectives like chyot'a (good)

souipta

(easy)

eryepta

(diflicult),

etc.

Its use in the Oppositive

Case appears principally in connection with verbs

tc,

modified by the conjunctional agglutinations manan,

tai,

nioa-^

as explained

on page 100.

1
-f 7|

ham
haki

action

From hata
)

(I

make).

acting

4
-i7l
\

pom
poki

sight

From pota

(I see).

seeing

N. B.

For
t.

the sake of euphony, the initial

of ilta (and its various

it is

modifications)
suffix

is

regularly dropped

when
This

the word to which

is

appended as a

ends in an open vowel sound.

ending in

especially the case

with the nomina-

tive case

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

137

13

param

hope

From parata

(I

hope).

hoping

cham

VFrom ckata
chaki
sleeping
arrival
j

(I

sleep),

om

SFrom

o ta (I come).

JL7]
>^7]
(II)

oki

coming
departure

kam
kaki

)^^^^

^^^^

^j

going

suffix,

Those derived from Relative Participles by adding the suffix choul. This modified for the instrumental case into choullo and then best rendered
is

by the preposition for,

I

found only with such verbs as alta, I know,, moronta,

know not, nekita, I think, chimchakhata, I suppose, etc. At times especially hoto followed by the Infinitive conveys when found with the Future Participle,

the nearest approximation to

its

use and meaning in English.

Exercise XLTI.
1.

2.

138

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise XLIII.
1.
il

hananchoul

molla
I

il

halchoul

making I know not I did not know he was engaged on the work.

work

work

making

moUa know not

work

do not know

how

to do the

letter

ara keul sseulchoul writing know you ?

keu
that

saram

man

Do you know how to

write.

chyoheunchoullo ara for good I know I took him for a good man.

keu
that

pai naiil olchoullo nekio coming boat tomorrow I think I think the ship will come tomorrow.

keuri thus

toilchoureun

chimchak
suppose
it

mot
not

hayesao

as for becoming I never supposed that

would

I made result in this way.

keu

chikeikoun oattenchoul molla came packmen I know not that I did not know that the pack coolie had come.

6.

keu
that

kyeichip

neulkeunchoullo
for old

arasso
I

woman
I took her for

know

an old woman.

choung-nom
I

piiest-fellow

choukeunchoul arasso dead I know thought the priest had died.

pyello Bpecially I do

chyoheuncboul good
not think
it

morokeisao

1 will not particularly good.

know

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

13D

In addition to those above mentioned, other Verbal Nouns are supplied

by appending the

suffixes

>y

chil

and Jj^

iiorat, signifying respectively

action

and

professioii or business, to the root

forms of certain nouns, as seen in the

following e-camples.

Exercise XLIV.

1.

tochek-chil thief-action I steal.

hanta
I

1^4

^a
hanta
I

yekchek-chil
rebel-action I rebel.

make

make

2.

:^^]^l
kcllei-chil

t^
hanta
I

^^l
8ol-chil

hanta

duster-action
I dust.

make

brush-action I I brush.

make

M
pana-chil needle-action
I sew.

-^^i
hanta
I

hanta
I

make

pouch'ai-chil fan-action I fan.

make

4.

>}3.
amo
any

Jcf ^
norat business

3^
to

t
hal

^
ket thing

*g>fe
is

even

making
at all

epso not

There

is

no profession

open to me.

sakoung-norat
sailor-business
I

orai

hayesso
I
sailor.

long

made

have long been a

^^^1
p'csyou-norat hunter-business

-fa ^>fcjcl

5.

t^vfe
hayesso
I

kounsa-norat hako to soldier-business and also I have been both hunter and soldier.

mad


140

COKEAN MANUAL.

ADVERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS AND ADJECTIVES.

Adverbs derived from Verbs and Adjectives are usually formed by substituting kei for ta (or k'ei for t'a) final of the Present Tense of the Ordinary
Conjugation:

^y^]

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

141

Exercise XLYI.

^
ton

^^1
mopsi bad
is

3J:7)JL
atkio cherishes

money

He

stingy :\ith his money.

ton

man
only

chyonnghi
heavily

nekio

money

He

cares for

he thinks nothing but money.

-f-t
oumoul
well

^J^l
kiphi

p'ara deeply dig Dig the well deep.

44

4.
i

p'aimoul
cmrio

this

touera kopkei place neatly Put this curio carefully away.

^
kea
that

^Vll
sarameul

44'']
poulsyangi
piteously pities that man.

'4*1-^
nekio

man

he thinks

He

a
keu
that

7^1/3^
kyeichipeul

woman Oman

chyohi good

a4
*

^*|^
nekio

he thinks

He

is

fond of that woman.

keu
that

kyeichipeul

woman

chyohoa good

hanta he makes

He
*

is

fond of that woman.

chyohoa

is

a pecuHar Verbal Participle derived from chyot'a I

am

good,

occuring only in the phrase chyohoa-hanta meaning "I love".

86

142

COKEAN MANUAL.
CAUSATIVE AND PASSIVE VEBBS,
Instead of Active and Passive Voices, the Corean language possesses a

convenient system of word construction producing a causative meaning and hence

aptly termed "causative" construction.

sounds

It consists in the insertion of the vowel and on according to the requirements of Corean euphony, before ta final of the verb stem as seen in the Present Tense of the Ordinary Conjugation. The meaning of the verb alone is changed, and the conjugation remains unActive verbs are thui affected, the whole being treated as an iadspsudent verb.
i,

hi

rendered passive in sense and vice versa.

hita
(I

Thus jnalda
chouhta

(I

hinder) becomes

mak(I

cause to binder,
kill)
;

am
(I

hindered)

(I die)

becomes ckoukita
(I

cause to die, I
I awaken).

khaita

am

awake) becomes kkaiouta

cause to

wake,

Such at least is the general principle pervading the language but in many words an allied active sense is produced adding to the expressiveness Thus mekta (I eat) passes into viekita (I cause to of the Corean vocabulary. Vata (I ride) into t'ahita (I cause to ride, I mount). A great claes eat, I feed) of verbs possessing this "causative" formation, have their verb stem ending in I and with such words Corean euphony requires ni to be inserted between the
;

stem and ta
read sallita
mollita
(I

final of
(I

the Present Tense.

live,

Thus
;

salta (I live)
(I

cause to
driven).

I save

life)

molta

drive)

becomes 6al-nita, heGomes inol-nita read

,

am

Exercise XLVTI.
1.

t
mal
horse

X^ ^
pori barley

"^^^^
mekyera
feed barley to eat.

chom
little

Give the pony a

little

tocheknom
thief

mok

peiye

Beck having cut He beheaded the thief.

choukyesso he killed

mal
horse

anchang
saddle

chiouera load Saddle the pony

na

etai

kakeitta
will

I am
ta
all

where
going out.

go

kangei
in river

ereum
ice
ice in the river

nokyesso

was melted
all

The

has

melted-

CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.
EXERCISE XL VII
5.

143

{continued).

^4
nareul

^'l
naiil

*'>-i
ach'am morning
early

"l^"']
ilcheuki early

^1^4
kkaiouera

me
6.

tomorrow

waken

Waken me

tomorrow morning.

chal well

mot
not
I

hayesso
;

have made I have done wrong

sallye-chousio life give please pray forgive me.

saved

'

^^}^]
tongsanei

5]

*H
ta

-2.4
mora

M| <^ ef
naiyera expel

toiachi

from garden

pig driven Drive tlie pigs out of the garden.

toiachi

pig

moliye nakasso been driven have gone out The pigs have all been driven out.
all

MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMATIC USES OF THE VEBB.

(1)

The

Relative Participles, Present, Past and Future, are frequently found used

idiomatically with the suffixes

Cj '^.tairo,
is

tiL

.^'mank'eum,

etc.,

with

a sense equivalent to the English as

like,
(2)

the custom, as is proper, as

you

etc.

One
in

of the

commonest idioms of the (!orea,n language is that which consists appending to the Present and Future Eelative Participles of the verb
forms of action,
possibility, probability etc.
for

suffixes expressive o^ various

Of these forms some

of reference,

of the

most important are here given

convenience

appended exempli gratia to the

common

verb hata, though

they

may

of course be used with

any other verb.

I

^ ^ S^ ^ CL
"^S \^

hanan-teut-hata

am probably

doing, etc.

"1

^ ^ |5-t4
u|. -gr
\rt

^ ^

IS"

^H hanan-tat-hata
hal-teut-hata
hal-tat-hata

[j
)

^^
am
am am

^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^

^ ^
-g"

pL
"Cl

hal-man-hata
hal-pen-hata

capable of doing, etc.

I I

on the point of doing,

pretending to do,
etc.

etc.

V V^

"Clhanan-ch'yei-hata

144

COREAN MANUAL.
hal-ch'yei-liata

I will pretend to do, etc.

It is

hal-ppoun-ilta

merely this he

is

doing.

hanan-tai
hal-tai

Since I

am

making.

Since I will make.

hanan-ttai
hal-ttai

Time

of doing (present).

hal-sai

Time

or period of doing,

(future).

hal-chei

hal-chek
hanan-t*e

/The
'

position, duty or

power

to do.

1^
<3)

hal-t'e

Many

of these

suffixes

likewise

occur

with

the

Past Kelative

Participle, but their use

and

mining

can easily be seen from the above

the Present and Future Participles. given examples of their use with in rya or rye (see page 127) to gerundive In addition to the use of the combinations are formed by adding kochyaexpress intention, two new

hata

(or

kockye-hata) and

kosipouta to the verb stem.

verb hata for an example again,

we

get

Thus with the

^ "^ ^ y^
JJ7

y(^

-g* "Cl ha-kochyahata

I intend to do, etc.

"S"
l^

^
^i

ha-kochyehata
ha-kosipouta

1 propose to do, etc. I desire to do, I

>%

would
etc.

like to do,

<4)

The

mcheuh hata expresses the meaning of it is pleasant, worthy, Verbal Participle by a connecting capable or possible and is joined to the requirements of euphony. {N. B.Chak is vowel a or e according to the
suffix

^ -^ J^ ^ Cl 6i ^ ^ XX
6^:

found in use at times

for cheuk).
-It is

"pL haya-mcheuk hata

pleasant to do.

0^

-g"

haye-mcheuk hata

\J

poa-mcheuk hata

It is

pleasant to see.

t^ 6j

-^ '^

"Cl-

meke-mcheuk hata

It is pleascnt to eat.

145

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
The
suflfix

(5)

chi added to the verb stem produces a

variety of

meanings: of

which the two most important are

(a)

"S"

^j
^]

hachi kachi

to to

make

An
yX.
\jf

Infinitive

go

forming

negation

ri32), and

regularly used in (g.t?. pages 131, especially with tlie verb

JM

pochi
etc.

to see
etc.

mara, malko.

etc.

(b)

-S"

^j
^1
etc.

hachi

do I make
I do

? etc.

make,

etc.

^
(C)

ochi

do
I

come

? etc

Used both interrogatively and affirmatively for all persona singular and plural.

come,

etc.

etc.

There are two special forms of the Future Tense with which the student would do well to familiarise himself, occurring frequently aa they do ia
Corean colloquial:
(a)

-^
"f

Ct

harita

^ ^ Cl

haorita

}-

j
]

Used for the first and third persons They are polite singular and plural. forms used by inferiors to superiora or by equals towards each other for the sake of courtesy.

(b)

^U} hama

Restricted to the first person in connecwith the indirect speech {oratio }obliqua) and generally followed by the ko marking it accordingly. ) enclitic
[ tion

^
CO

^
'C^

"^

bad made or I had said. etc.. used generally in closing an Imperfect or Pluperfect tense for all persons
speech. a sentence or with ko in the indirect

"II

made

or I said, etc.,

^ ^^*

(8)

^^ ^

hateran

derived from the a Relative Participle formation

abovefiawi

or

woflfe.

37

146

COEEAN

MASn^UAL.

Exercise XLYIII.

sakton

nam

chounan

tairo

GONJUGATION OF YEBBS.

147

Exercise XLIX.

moksyou
carpenter

pouUe
call

il

sikil

tairo

sikyera

work about to order according to order Call the carpenter and tell him to do what you like.

^
ton

4i&
sseunan
uaincj

^[3.
tairo

^ef
SBera

money

according to
as required.

use

Use the money

ton

sseul

tairo

sseuo

money

about to use according to use Use the money as you like.

ton

money

mank'eum sseul kachye-kakexa ne taken-go you about to use size Take away whatever money you want.

5.

toinan

tairo

becoming

according to

amorik'ena any way whatever

it
c|.n

haycra

make

Do

it

any way that

be done.

chei

oma

hanta

chei

himself will come he says

himself

will

omako come

hanta he says

He
^] ^J=
**]

says he will

come

himself.

-t ^d
haten

*H
ireul

^1

"4

-f f 3t -f
hamako will make

michyangi

ef

naiil

p'iryek

hatera

made work to-morrow finish mason The ra.ason said he would finish the work he was

he said

doing, tomorrow.


148

COREIN MANUAL.

ADYERBS.
In addition to the Adverbs derived from Verbs and Adjectives, referred
to

on page 140, the Coreau language

also possesses a large

proper, which in

common with

the others qualify and precede the

number of Adverbs Verb or Adjective,

and are not subject to inflexion, except occasionally when two ideas are placed A few in contrast by means of the Oppositive Case suffix in eun, an, etc.
Adverbs appear with the Locative or Instrumental case endings in
TO, etc,
ei,

eisye, euro,

but the sense

is

purely adverbial and

all

signification of case

inflexion

is practically

absent from the mind of the speaker.

etc.

Some

of the

more common

Adverbs of time, place, manner, degree,

of reference:
(1)

are here appended for convenience

TIME.
JuBt now.

*V4

As

yet.

Entirely.

Already.
Karly.

By and
Long

by.

time.

In a short time.
In
this year.

Always.

Afterwards
Continually
Directly.


ADVERBS.

149

mm
monchye
neutkei
palsye

Beforehaad.

Formerly.
Late.

Already.

sipang
soui

At present
Soon.

taeum
tasi

Next.
Again.

tora

>Back

again.

5:5:

toro

chamkkan
chacho
chyeptai

Moment.
Often.

The

other day.

chyenei

Before.
Instantly.

^^)
For
54, 55.

cheuksi

chikeum
special adverbs referring to the day, the

NoAy.

month,

the. year,

etc., see

pp

few others are here appended

ach'amei
it'eunnal

In the early morning.

Next

day.

nachai
nathouei

At noon.

vin the afternoon.

i

ohouei

pamei

At

night.

)
38

saipyekei
<>\]

At day break.
In the forenoon.

sikchyenei

150

CORE AN MANUAL.

162

COKEAN MANUAL.

^>*5.

POSTPOSITIONS

153

164

COREAN MANUAL.

77^]

CONJUNCTIONS.

155

Exercise L.

ch'a tea

4 4 44 ^ 3iv^
ta oa ch'atcnyong innanya all and tea-cup are? Have you got tea and teacups ready ?

2.

6))
yei

^
syoul

wine Yes

syoui-chan koa tto wine-cups and also and also wine and wine glasses.

4 t4

*J
are

it

isso

-n
ir^-k'ei

o '}^

thus

taichyepeul enterta'inment

hasini

komapso
thanks

Thanks

for

make-because your kind reception.

dt

4
oa

177|)
maikkei on pony

c^
ta
all

>^Hef
sirera

80

bull

and

Load both

load the bullocks and the horses.

^
pout

4 ^^

t^

pen

sa ta koa chyoheui buy and all paper I have bought both pens and paper.

^>

^>fc
oasso

come

^
chye
that

^} a
saram

man

hako and

na
I

hako and
go together.

katch'i

kakeitta
will

tosether

go

He and

I will

syoul

wine

pout-ko pour-and

ch'a tea

kachye-onera bring-come
tea.

Pour out the wine and bring the

156

OEEAN MANUAL.
EXERCISE L

{continued).

onareun
as for today

naiireun kongpou-ha-ko koukyeng-kao study-make-and as for tomorrow picnic-go Study today and go for a picnic tomorrow.

9.

JL
keu
that

7}
kang
river

^]-fmaiou

^3.

7jt^

nelp-ko kipta broad-and is deep very That river is very broad and deep.

10.

1
pi

J-3.
o-ko

11?|
ilkeui

S.^^
chyoheumyen
will

rain

if be good come-ond weather With rain and good weather there

p'oung-Tiyen plenty-year

f^
full

^IJL
*

io
is

be

crops.

INDIRECT HPEECH.
(OB ATI

OBLIQU-A)

To

the student, no part of the Corciin language presentii greater difficulty

than the correct rendering of the connecting particle required in indirect spoech with the verb hanta {mal lianta) I speak, etc. The rule is that the subordinate

noun

clause
;

ra, etc

is regularly constructed in the Ordinary Conjugation, ending in ta and enclitic particle ko (which otherwise possesses no ineuphonic the

dependent meaning or use)

is

then added as a

suffix to the

verb closing this

sentence.

noun clause
but

and

finally

comes

hatita (I speak or say) completing the

is also

"Besides Ao as the enclitic connective, hako

employed

for the

same purpose,

In continuous colloquial speech, instead of actually inserting the verb hanta, I speak, ko or hako may be used alone, as they are
less frequently.

much

sufficient to indicate the

part

of

the

phrase or sentence in the oratioobliqua,

and may be translated accordingly I say that, he says that, etc. Tliese enclitics ko or hako must be carefully distinguished from the two copulative conjunctions ko and hako used for and. Ko and hako followed by the verb hanta (I speak)
serve to

mark
to

the end of the clause in the oratio ohliqua, and in meaning cor-

respond with our Ea:^lish conjunction i/wieither expressed or understood

the verbs
say,
tell,

with

speak, etc.

From two

C'liinesc derivatives

meaning plenty and

y^nr.

INDIEECT SPEECH.

157

Exercise LT.
1.

^^I^f
cheika
self

jSLf
oma
will

t^
hanta he says promises to come

come
o?'

He

says he will

come

He

cheika
self

oma-ko
will-come

He

says he will

hanta he says come.

^^14
cheika
self

-^^^^
okeitta-ko
will

t^
hanta he says

come

He

says he will come.

cheika
self

He

orye-ko hanta intends to come he says says he intends to come.

cheika
self

keu ttai oatta-ko time that came He says he came at that time.

hanta he says

ton

money

He

hanta he says says he will give the money.

choukeitta-ko
will give

pit

debt

tomorrow

He

hanta he says says he will pay the debt tomorrow.

naiil

kapheumako
will

pay

echei

chipei
to

katta-oattako

yesterday

house
says he

went-came

hanta he says

He
40

went home yesterday.

lo

COREAN MANUAL.

BXEKCISE LII.
1

-? ^1 vi Jr hatai nanan nenan chyot'ako though say as for me as for you good is Though you say it is gO'.)d I do not want

S 4a
^
t^f

^^ ^4
seult'a refuse
it.

'z

x^.

^
I

=1 a|.

6] fe

cf
ta
all

ef

c|.

jI

nanan
as for

me

olch'imanan am right but

t^
hanta
say

tarani-nan
as for otlxers

keuratako

am

right but every

body

else says

am wrong I am wrong.

nai
I

chipei in house

ittako

nameuikei

mal
speech

hachi
to

mara
arvid

am
Don't
tell

any

to otheas one that I

make

am

at

home.

-^

4 7j 4
leisure I

<^|

<^

^
:

v| H]

onareun as for today

t^^X t ^ 4
orako *

kyereuri

epsani as is not
tell

naiil

hayera

have no time today

tomorrow to come say him to come tomorrow.

echei yesterday

He

oattako issesye pyengi mot have come not sickness been says he could not come- as he was sick yesterday.

hanta
says

euiouen
doctor's

mekeumyen yak natkeittako mari hanta will recover if eat speech medicine says The doctor says he v.'ill get well if he will take the medicine.
-f-61]

7.

ZL
keu

^l^
ireul

^^ 5^

JL

*)- 6}:

t^

'^:il

aroiye poaya ouei alkeittako will know that affair above i.e. the King reported if only see He says he will only know by memorializing the King.

hanta
says

t^

keuri

mot
not

thus

He
*

k'eun naugp'ai toikeittako great disaster will become says thcie will be serious loss unless he can act thus.
i
'

Lfmyni make

hanta
says

Orako

is

derived

from tho gerundive in ra

(or re)

with

ko as

the

enclitic connective with hania, I say.

INDIKEGT SPEECH.

169

Exercise LIIL
^^1
chei oneself

^^^^ t^^f^
eronsiD.ci

^^l ^"^

^^

alleunta-ko

He
2.

fathsr says his father

is

is Rick-(says) sick and he has

euiouen pora kasao has gone to see doctor gone to see the doctor.

syoiil oatta-ko sara wine has come- (says) guest to buy He says guests have come and he has gone to

sonnim

kasso has gone buy wine.

3.

P3'eng sickness

kotch'ikeitta-I.o

pon
native
illujess

koukeuro
to c;-untry

torakasso

He

he will cure-(5ays) says he will cure hi

has returned

and has returned to his country.

chim
load

ta
all

ponaiyetta-ii:o

naikei

p'yenchi
letter
all

He

has sent- (says) to me has written to say that he sent

hayesso has made the baggage.

kasye having gone

p'alla-ko

Go and
6.

to sell- (enclitic) see if he will

haye-poara * having made-see

sell.

nai I

keuri

hatera-ko
said-(^;ays)

nameuikei
toothers
so.

mal
speech

mara
avoid

thus

Do
'

not

tell

any one that I said

p|
nei

i:
mal

^}

3.
it

i-'t
hamyen
if

S.^2^JL
chyok'eitta-ko
it

t^
hanta
says

tairo

your

speech according to

he does
all

He

says

Vvili

be

right

if

hanta good he says he acts as you say.

will be

this

keurat basin

sseuki

He

using says the basin

cbyot*a-ko te isgood-(says) more is useful and bids you

sa-ora-ko

buy-to-comebuy some more.

* haye-pota

means

to

try

ko preceding haye

is

euphonic

and palla

the gerundive.


160

COREAN MANUAL.

THE DOUBLE IMPERATIVE.

While ko, the enclitic connective, can appear even without hanta (I say, speak, etc.), and thus marks the close of the part of the phrase or sentence containing the indirect speech, ko itself, when preceded by a gerund of a verb and followed by the imperative hay era (say etc.,) is likewise dropped, and by elision Thus ora-ko hayera and contraction a new combination is formed in aira. becomes ora-hayera (to come-say), which again is further modified into or-aira, with a double imperative sense meaning tell him to come, order him to come, etc.

EjKFJicisE

JAY.

pohaingkoun
courier

ilcheuki oraira early tell to come Tell the courier to come early tomorrow.
naiii

tomorrow

%
^mokounkoun
coolies
il

pouchareni

haraira
tell to

diligently Tell the coolies to be diligent.

work

make

a.

syoul chom kyokounkoun mekeuraira little wine tell to eat chair coolies Tell the chair bearers to drink a little wine.

elleuii

quickly

naika cook I Tell him to get dinner ready soon

pap

chieuraira

etai

kakeitta
will

rice

tell to

somewhere
;

go

am

going out.

hain servant

pang chyenghi room cleanly Tell the servant to sweep the room
to (postpos.)

tarye *

sseullaira *
tell to

sweep

clean.

sseullaira from sseulla the gerund oisseulta, (see gerundive page 124),

ADDITIONAL
EXEECTSES.

41

162

COREAN MANUAL

Exercise

1.

oumouri
well

maiou
very well is very deep.

kipso

deep

The

ettek'ei

mantalkeisso
will

how

How
3.

do you want

it

make made?

^
chal well
i

5|7l 1
toikiral

^4-^
parao
I expect

becoming
I expect
it

well made.

this

ket thing

What
6.

mouesai what do you use

for

sseukeisso
will this for?

use

elmana

kouhao

desire how many How many do you want?

6.

chokom
little

man
only I only want a

tallahao

demand
little.

sikinan ordering

tairo

hayera

according

make
told.

Do

as

you are

pf-i
taran another

tj]
tai

^^]
sseultai

*J>fe
is

use place It is of no other use.

epso not

EXERCISES.

163

EXEBCISE

1 (continued).

^1
ouei

^V^
neutkei
late

why

oannanya have come

late.

"Why^are you
10.

onareun
to-day
I

pyello particularly

neutchiant'a late not is

am

not very late to-day.

IL
i

mal

ch'eeumeuro

teuresso

this

speech for first time I heard I heard this for the first time.

12.

^
ta
all

t
han
one

^i^

^1
is

JL

moyangio
kind
are all fo one kind.

They
13.

43^4
charireul

^71)
k'eukei
largely

4^]
chapchi
to seize so much space.

^io}
malla
avoid

mat

Don't take up

14.
i

pang

neme
is

chyopta
small

this

room The room

too too small.

15.

nanan
as for

etai

ancheura
to sit
I to sit ?

hao

me

where

make

Where am
16.

iren this

>H
ket thing

naika
I

kouhanan
seeking what I want.

kesio
article is

This

is

164

COEEAN

ll^IANUAL.

Exercise 2
1

0]
i

y]A]
kesi

zt
keu

?X

3\.

^4^J:4
katchiant'a

this

thing

ket koa thing with that These two things are different.

not ahke

2.

yekeui here

amo
a'ny

There

is

to ket thing ever nothing here whatever.

epso not is

him
strength

sse

have

poara
see
see.

use

make
j'our

Try
4

utmost and

|
mal
speech

-7

^)

7j|

>k

chal karach'ikeisso well will teach I will teach you to speak well.

patheui
field's

p'oul

maiyera

weeds

weed
field.

Weed
6.

the

tongsanei

namou
v/ood

simera

garden

sow

Plant trees in the garden.

matangeul

chyenghi

compound
Sweep

sseurera clean sweep the court clean.

8.

ton

chom
little

kkouye
having lent
a
little

chouo
give

money

Lend me

money.

EXEKCISES.

165

EXEBCISE
9.

2 {continued).

^^J keunsim
anxiety
I

4*^1
chyoiingei
in

^^
isso
is

midst
in trouble.

am

10.

aronch'yei
interfering

malko
avoid

Don't

interfere.

naikei
to

koankyeich'iant'a

me
It does not

no concern is matter to me.

12.

keu
that

sarameun

pouchya
rich

yo
is

man

He
13.

is

a rich man.

*!
i

^^-1
mareul
speech

5l/|
mitchi

t^
malko
avoid

this

Don't

to trust believe that talk.

kil

road

The
15.

nelpta broad is very road is very broad.

maiou

^*)
taiki
sir

<*|-1*}
atari

How
10.

myetch'io how many are sons many children have you ?

^^

6].^
atal

^ 4 ^
toul

-^vf.
hana one

^6J41
touesso placed

sons

two

daughter I have two sons and one daughter.

* Oppositive case.

koa and

ttal

42

166

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

3.

4^1
t'ongei in tub

moul
water

Pour water

4.

S.

EXEECISES.

167

EXERCISE

{co7itinued).

ninsaikhan
avaricious

saramio

man
is

ii

He
10.

avaricious.

ch'aikeul

^H ^ ^^^
ta

book

all

poasso have seen

I have read

all

this book.

11.

f
p'oul

weed

ouheui chari p'yera above mat spread Spread the mat over the grass.

T^

4^1

^^

12.

chip

house

syeikan property He has lost

ta
all all

irhesso

has lost

his property.

13.

14.

15-

16.

68

COKEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

4.

hayera tairo make according experience Act according to experience.

sokyeii
'

maiou
very
It is

keurat

toiyesso

has become exceedingly wrong.

wrong

neunghi
able

kamtang
responsible

hakeisso
will

make

I have full qualifications.

oral

kyentaichi
to endure

mot
not
it

hakeitta
will

long

make

I cannot endure

any longer.

pyengi
sickness

chom
little
is

nasso
better
better.

He
6.

little

maiou
very

isyanghan
strange This is very strange.

irio

work

is

ettek'ei

how

What

saingkak think do you think?

hao

make

kakpakhi
rudely

koulchi

malla
avoid

to behave Don't behave rudely.

EXERCISES.

169

EXERCISE

4 (continued).

^^
ouri

^e|
touri

|73)
hamkkeui
together
act together.

%M]v}.
hapsyeita

we

two Let us

make

10.

kapsal
price

koahi

chouesso

He
11.

too many has given gave too much for it.

chom
httle

koupko tto chichyera and also fry Boil some and fry some.
boil

12.

koueumyen
if boil

chal mekkeitta well will eat It will taste best boiled.

13.

415.
pouiro

-S^l
monchi

4t^4
t^}
ilk'i
it.

with brush

Wipe
14.

sseurera dust wipe the dust off with a brush.

^^]
tetai

y}t
kamyen
if

^J'^
is

slow

go to lose If you are slow you will lose

souipta easy

15.

^4

<*]

nelp'ani

nelpko kilta board broad and long is The boards are broad and long.

4^

16.

chyekeui
there

marou

nohara

Put

flooring place the flooring there.

43

170

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1-

5.

4^1
orei this year

p'oung
plentiful
full

There are

teuresso has entered year crops this year.

nyen

^ :^^
hao

ssal

kapsi
price

tterechil-teut
fall

rice

probably Bice will probably fall in price.

make

kekchyeng epso paiksyengi anxiety not is people The people will not be anxious.

chyen
before

nyeneun

hyonngnyen

ichio

year of scarcity is year Last year was a year of scarcity.

chei his

tokkeuiro

pareul chei chchikesso his foot has cut axe He has brought this trouble on himself.

6.

4^J
tongsaing
brothers

katch'i *
like

^^i

^vl-f-a.
ch'inhao

They
7.

friendly are as friendly as brother.

keu
that

saram

mal

hampouro

hao

man

speech recklessly That man speaks recklessly.

makes

s|

^^^
sachyengeul
aifairs

y.^^
moronta

nameui
others

knows not

He

does not consider anybody.

* Adverb.

EXEKCISES.

171

EXERCISE

5 {continued).

^1
chei his

%
il

i
man

^a^-f
saingkak think

T^
hao

work

He
10.

only thinks only of himself.

makes

nai

sokyeneun
experience My experience

my
11.

keure-ch'ant'a thus is not

is diiferent.

te

more

ket thing I want nothing more.

desiring

kouhal

epso not is

12.

^)

^^
It
is

^l 6]
irio

JL
is

yeisaron ordinary

work

an ordinary

affair.

13.
1

saiei

this

period

sotongi reports
all

taitan

hao

exceeding

make

There are
14.
nalli

kinds of reports now.

^ 7f
war
nalka producing

^
fear

v^

5| Ji.
toio

ryemnye
M-ill

becomes
be war.

They
15.

are afraid there

4^1
officials

<)

koanoueni

tomanghayesso
ran away have run away

The
16.

officials

1^4
yekchek
rebels

"vV^l
manhi

^^
nasso

many

have produced
rebels.

There were maiiv

172

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

6.

paiami
serpent

issani *
is

patpi quickly
;

kao go

There

is

a snake

go quickly.

^^]
tasi

^^
make
pounpyelhal

J.t>k
pokeisso
I will see
,

salphye again having inquired

I will

further inquiries.

3.

t^ 1^1
pyello

^
ket thing

^^
epso
is

other

distniguishing not There is no other means of distinction.

4.

t^
talli

t
hal

T^n souka

^^
isso
is
it.

other

making
is

There

way another way of doing

<^]si
iren this

^J

5!>fc

ket tto isso thing more is There are more of this kind.

'"^I

"^l-fmaiou
very

f-f-fihaphao
corresponds views.

tteutei

with feeling

This suits

my

naika
I

hangsyang
always
I

keurek'ei

arasso

thus
of this opinion.

knew

was always

>|;^6]6}:
chikeumiya

>7)

^g

dl

kkaitatkeisso

now

It is

only only

now

I will realise it that I realise it.

Ni has the

force of a semicolon

see p. 63.

EXEKCISES.

173

EXERCISE
*)

6 (continued).

10.

11.

12.

1T4

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1.

1.

^^.
chyekeui
there

^>
ka go

4 7^4
setkera * stand be

Go
2.
i

there and stand.

these

ot clothes

Mend
3.

chal kiouera well mend these clothes well.

hai

sye

p'yenei
side
is

isso
is

sun

west The sun

in the west.

^^1
chei his

^4 t4
choireul
fault

-t-^
hao

hangpok

acknowledge

make

He
5.

confesses his fault.

kireul

ttarakachi
to

mot

hao

road

not I cannot keep up with you.

accompany

make

tomochi
altogether

elmana

toio

how many

become

How many

are there altogether ?

.3.5.73^
morokeisso I will not know I do not

-e||

J. of
poara
see
see.

hyei

4
hao

know

count count and

;

8.

nemou
too

chyeke
littla

sseuchi

mot
not

There

to use is too little to be of

make
use.

any

^''

Setkera se-itkera.

EXEECISES.

175

EXEBCISE

7 (continued).

chyello naturally
It
10.

keuri

toiyesso

thus

become
so of
itself.

became

^
They

^^1
tankin

^} S

*]

-^

nelli

saramio

broadly

travelling men are are great travellers.

11.

moun
They
12.

bearing

kyeni mant'a seeing many have had great experience.

16.

176

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1.

8.

chye
that

saram

man

choukkei * dying That man is going to

toiyesso

has become
die.

2.

-T-^
ouri

^Ji
chipei

4^7^
chyouika
rats

"^4
mant'a
are
rats.

our

house

many

Our house

is

overrun with

achik
as yet

eroun

mot
not
full age.

toiyesso

man

become

He
4.

is

not yet of

*a^
ilcheuk
early

"f*^
noue
resting to bed early.

4-^
chao
sleep

Go
6.

A]
syei

^1
ouel

oj;

T ^ 4:
hayesso

man

hepi

year

month

He

only waste was only wasting time.

made

kamcharal
potatoes

eteul

sou

obtaining

way

epso not is

There are no means of getting potatoes.

7.

tr^y}

EXEKCIHES.

177

EXERCISE
9.

8 (continued).

nophi
highly

kere

hang

touera place

Hang
10.

it

high up.

kere

toul
is

tai

hang There
11.
i

placing place no place to hang

epso not is
it.

pyengeul
sickness

this

Can
12.

chal kotch'ikeisso well will cure you cure this sickness ?

yak medicine

meko
eat

chyosyep

chal

hao

well recovery Take medicine and be careful.

make

mal
horse

chamkkan
little

poutchapara take hold of

little.

Hold the horse a

pai ship
It is

arai

isso
is

below

down

in the hold.

15.

ourinan
as for us

ryangsik
supplies are out of food.

epso not is

We
16.

*>]
i

^^
hainan
loss

'^]A
nouika

^
tang

t^
hao

this

who
makes

Who
45

responsible good this loss?

make

178

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise
^-1
cL'aik

9.

^4 J:
sseukeisso
?

books will write Will you write a booh

sseukeisso will write I will not write (a book).

mot

not

3.

ouei

keuri

hao

why

thus

make
so?

Why
4.

7l

1
no

'd

^
"J

kyeral
leisure I have

epso not is
leisure.

5.

-I
pol

'i,'']
iri

4
to.

marit'a

about to look work many I have much business to attend

'i^]jL
irio

mousam
what

work
kind of business?

What
7.

chyangsa
trade
I I

hanta

make

am

tradinef.

:^}^
chyanpjsa trade

*a^^)*J:^t

pyenpyench'ianso good not is Trade is not good.

EXEECISES.

179

EXEBCISE

9 {continued).

hoaryounsyen
fire-wheel-ship

A
10.

ani oasso has come not steamer has not come.

yang
foreign

moki
cloth

pis-ssa

dear

is

Piece goods are dear.

11.

syek stone

you
oil

manhi

teureoasso

many
oil

has entered
arrived ?

Has
12.

plenty of kerosene

chikeumeun

chokom

man

oasso

little only has as for the present Only a little has come at present.

come

13.

keuremyen
if it

ettek'ei

hao

is

thus

how
is

makes

it

What
14.

then to be done ?

nanan
I I

morokeisso
will not

know

cannot

tell.

15.

hal

about to

make
is

There

Bouka epso plan not is nothing to be done.

16.

44
olt'a

ae^
keuri

-?4
hacha

true

thus

make
so.

Good

do

180

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

10.

^y}
naika
I

Syeoul oUa Seoul ascend I am going to Seoul.

^^ ^^
t^
ttai

7}^
kanta go

2.

6^ ^
ena

7].

7^>t
go

kakeisso
will

what

time

Wlien

will

you go?

3.

^1 -^
chikeum

Jl 3. eH
tell at

^
kao
I go

now
I cannot

morokeisso I will not know

present.

iri

epsamyen
not is If nothing prevents
if

nai-il

work

to-morrow

me

I'll

go to-morrow.

5.

1
mal
horse

^^^
t'akeisso will ride

JL^
pokyo

^^^
t'akeisso
isso
is

chair will ride Will you go by chair or on horseback ?

6.

yekeui here

mal chyoheun horse good Are there good horses here

7.

yekeui here

innan
being

mal

ta

chyekeun
small
all

The
8.

all horse horses here are

kesio things are

small.

mal
horse

saknaiye

onera

wages take out Hire a horse.

come

EXEKCISES.

181

EXEBCISE
9.

10 (continued).

ton

elmana

choukeisso
will

money

how much How much money

will

you give you give.

JO.

taran other

earam

elmana

chouo
gives

man

how much
do others give?

How much
11.

t
han one

I^
mareui
horse

5J
tan
five

nyang nyang

^ i
sik

each

Five nyang for each horse.

12.

^
nai

^f/d
ham
servants
Call

^^
poulle
call

^^^
onera

my

come

my

servants.

13.

mal
horse

chim
burden

sirera

load
horse.

Load the
14.

chim
baggage

mant'a

sokei

sirera

many on ox There's much baggage;

load load bulls.

15.

mal
horse

is

epso not

so

man
;

isso
is

ox

There are no horses

16.

only only bulls.

enchei

when

When
46

tora oa molla back come not know do you return ? I cannot say.

182

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise
^^
chal well

11.

51

innanya
are
?

V ^

Are you well

2.

yei

yes

chal well

isso I am

Yes

am

well.

pap
rice

mekennanya
have eaten

Have you dined ?

pap
rice

ani

not

mekesso have eaten

I have not dined.

i).

t
syoul

-J
man

1^
meke
innanya
is

wine

only I eat I only take wine.

tampai
tobacco
Is there

any tobacco?

t^l
tampai

^}
sa

^^
taikio
is

oasso tobacco buy have come I bought tobacco.

8.
i

nyangpan
gentlemaxi

noui

this

who
this

Who

is

house gentleman?

EXEKCISES.

183

EXEBCISE

11 (continued).

yekeui here

irman being

saramio

man

is

He
10,

belongs to this place.

syengi

mouessio

name

what
is

is

What

his

name?
6)

y%
Pang Pang

/^ a^
He
syepang Mr. is Mr. Pang.

12,

18,

14.

15.

16.

184

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1

13.

^/il
tai-in

^.^
sonnim
guest

^^
oasso

great

man

has come Visitors have come, sir.

2.

myet

pouni *

osennanya

how many gentlemen have come How many gentlemen are there?
3.

'*'l sei

poun

*|

J:
io

*>}'<^
?

three

gentlemen are There are three.

ne ananya you know Do you know them

na
I

mot
not

poa
seen to I know nothing of

mot know not them whatever.

achi

hao

make

5.

kyokoun
chair-coolie

Have

t'ako oannanya ride and came they come in chairs?

ta
all

mal t'ako oasso pony ride and came They all came on horseback.

7.

^f ol

3J vr

hain iunanya servant is Have they any servant ?

8.

^^

"^

teuryesso card presented jBag-hand The attendant brought their cards.

* Nucaerative of gentlemen.

keuisyou

myengham

^ ^ !i ^

EXERCISES.

185

EXE BOISE

12 {continued).

^
nai

4t
ch'inhan
friendly They are

4jI
ch'inko
friend

a
yo
is

my
10.

my

good

friends.

sarangei
in

guest-room

Show
11.

moisye teuryera attend present them into the drawing-room.

chokom
little

anchye having sat

kitario

wait wait a
little.

Sit

down and

12.

ch'a
tea

taichyep hay era welcome make Pour out some tea for them.

poue poured

*|
1

1-^
pouneun
gentleman

^
noui

^]
sio *
is

this

who
gentleman
?

Who

is

this

alko

know and
Let
15.

me

chinaio pass introduce you.

nai

tongnai
village

ch'inko
friend

yo
is

my

A
16.

friend from

my

village.

<| 6]
taiki f

.^ol

o]x
io
is

chyouin house master Are you the master,

sir ?

Sio please.

Tailci sir.

47

186

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1.

13.

chikeum

^4 ^^H
ch'acha seek
oassini

:a"J-a:
komapso
thanks

now

Thanks
2.

for

have come your visit.

^4;
mousam
what

malsam
speech

t^
it.

*|-i
io
is

Don't mention

^>
oikouk
foreign

v}^
taran another

saram

man

nara nation

^^
oasye

come

A
4.

foreigner visiting another country,

5!^1
etchi

^ *I -I
chyouineul master Why not
call

*hH ani
not

^>fc
ch'atkeisso
will seek

how

on you,

sir ?

5.

^^J
chyemsim
tifi&n

1^)^
hamkkewi
together
tiffin

hapsyeita let us make

Have
6-

with me.

oai

ehopaneul

kat mekko just eat and breakfast I have just had my breakfast

oasso

came

7.
i

^>
this

$!>tH
issani
is
;

>y.^j^
chapsouo
(please) eat

ket thing

mat
taste Try this
it

tastes nice

mat
taste It
is

issye

^^

"^^

being good.

chal mekso well eat I've dinad well.

EXERCISES.

187

EXERCISE

13 (continued).

nai

chipeuro

ban
one
see

pen
time
time.

osio

my
10.

house

come

please

Come and

me some

)tyereul leisure

issamyen
if

is

I will call

when

ch'acha seek I can find time.

karita

go

nari

chyemeuressini *
late
It is getting late
;

day

kapsyeita let us go
go.

must

12.

jie|
keuri

^^]
patpi quickly

^}^
kamyen
if

^^
mouet what
hao

tJL
hao

thus

Why
13.

go in such a hurry ?

make

chom
little

ancbye
sat Sit

down

niaki-na story some and talk a bit.

make

chamkkan
directly

pol seeing

iri

isso
is

work

I have

some business waiting.

15.
iri

onera

kyokoun
chair-coolie chair-coolies.

poullera
call

here

come Boy call the

!

10.
tai-in

moisiko

kakera

great

man Go and

serve and go see His fixcellency out.

Ni has

the force of a semicolon

see p. 63.

188

COPvEAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1.

14.

ry}x^6)]
matangei
in court

vf^
namou

6|wv|:
innanya

Are
2

trees are there trees in the courtyard ?

c^a
taran other

x^^
namou

c^jl

oV

^^
isso

man kkot epko wood only not is and flowers There are no trees, only^^fiowers.

are

kkot
flowers

The

chyot'a poki is good seeing flowers in bloom are a pretty sight.

p'ouiye

have flowered

tongsanei
in garden

silkoa
fruit

namou wood
garden.

isso
is

There are

fruit trees in the

keu
that

silkoa
fruit

mekki
eating

chyot'a
is

good

That

fruit is

good to

eat.

pathei
in field

p'ouri

mant'a

weeds
field is full of

many
weeds.

are

The
7.

maiko namoul simera pull and weeds first sow vegetables First pull out the weeds and then sow vegetables.
p'oul

^^
monchye

^]a

^t

>3*^ef

6|
i

pathei *

^^
*

^0]
p'ouri

*J^ epso
not are
this field.

this

field weeds There are no weeds in

Locative case.

EXEECISES.

189

EXERCISE
9.

14 (continued).

^^t
keuremyen
if

'I't
namoul
vegetables vegetables then.

^J

H
sow

simera

4
-f

thus

Sow
10.

^
ta
all

^-^
simeun

^"^1
houei
after
all

5!^j
etchi

JL

hao

sown
After they are

how
?

make

sown, what next

11.

nal

mata
each

moul
water
day.

chouera
give

day

Water them every

12.

o]
i

"^^
namou wood
There
is

s.^
chyoheun

i.^]
yelmai

51^
isso
is

this

good fruit fine fruit on these trees.

.13.

houei afterwards

silkoa
fruit

chal well
fruit

yelkeisso
will

open

There
14.

will be

good

by-and-by.

nari

kameumyen
if

day
If the

dry
is

weather

ta kkotch'i all flowers dry, the flowers will

marakeis8o
will dry
all

up

dry up.

15.

^i*^l ehyenyekei
in evening If you water

moul
water

choumyen
if

^t ^^
give
it

kekchyeng
fear

IJ^ epta
not
is

them

in the evening,

will be all right.

16.

j.%
onal to-day

17}pika
rain
I think
it

-ky}
olka

^^
pota
I see

coming

likely

will rain to-day.

48

190

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise
1-

15.

^0]
nari

^t-tH
syeneurhani
fresh
It is

koukyeng

i-4

^^
chal well

y\
ka go

day

sight-seeing fine day to go for a walk.

2.

onareun *
to-day

etai

where Where will you go to-day

ch'youriphakeisso will saunter for a walk ?

3.

kal

tai

manheuntai
being

al

sou

going

place

There are so

many knowing means many places to go to, I can't

epso not is
tell.

ni

my

tongmo companion

hantai
before

ka
go

m(

'ire-po

inquiio see

Go and

ask

my

friend.

^\^
onareun
to-day

7^4
kyereur

"^^
;

^i.*a
nai-il

7)^1. -^
kapsyeita
let

We
6.

epso leisure not is have no time to-day

to-morrow
let

us go

us go to-morrow.

y\^
kamyen
if

%
han
one

^
sou
several

%
il

A/'i<^
toikeisso

go

How

will become day many days will you be gone ?

this

nari kameuressini saii day has dried period It has been dry weather of late.

s.

^>^-) o|
koksiki crops

x^
ta
all

u^e^,]
marakei
all
t

^x\
tointa

The

crops are

dry become being burnt up.

Oppositive case.

Adverb.

EXEECIBES.

191

EXERCISE

15 {continued),

pi

omyen
if

rain If there
10.

comes

is rain,

we

dial tointa well become will have a good crop of darley.

pori barley

echyekkeui yesterday

noun snow
fall

nianhi

oatta

much
of

came
yesterday.

There was a heavy

11.

snow

^0|
nari

;x|4|

4>^

chal koksik mot tointa ch'ioue well crops not weather become being cold The season is cold and the crops don't ripen properly.
12.

^^

o]^j\

onareun echyekkeui chipteni to-day yesterday cold Yesterday it was cold; to-day it is warm.
13.

^J^H

jL^-8:

^^
tepta
is

warm

koksik crops

ssal chal kap narikeitta toimyen rice price will descend well if become If there are good crops, the price of rice will fall.

^^
ouri

44

our

ollye keuiho * nara having ascended flag nation Hoist the national flag.

^1

-1^^

"^0}^tarara

hang up

nari

etououl

ttai

ke

ui

day

darkening

time

flag

naryeaa descend

Lower
16.

the flag at dusk.

nal

mata
every

keu
thus

tairo

hayera

day

Do
* Keui or keuiho

according this every day.

make

flag.

Here the

latter is better.

192

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise
X.

16.

Chyosyen Corean

soka

maiou

k'euta
is

ox The Corean ox

very big is very large.

2.

chim
loads

manhi

sitko

pat

chal

kalta
tills

field well carries and many Good for carrying loads and cultivating the

fields.

3.

*)
i

^^
syourei
cart

-fTl^
moukeoue
being heavy
cart is

zt-|7]
kkeueulki

^^^^
eryepta
is difficult

tlfts

drawing
difficult to

The

heavy and

draw.

him

strength

sseumyen chal kkeueulkcitta man if use well will draw only If you only exert yourself you will draw it easily.

5.

hoangsokei *
bull

meiyeya
cafrrying

chal well
will pull
it

kkeueulta
pulls
better.

A
6.

bull

yoked to

it

*]
i

cheumsaing

^^

^3,
molko drive and

^1}
naka

^*^ef
mekyera
feed

these

out go animals Drive the animals out to feed.

7.

4<>]-;*l
songachi
calf

^^
nosai

i^l
manch'i
size

^cf
k'euta is big

mule

A
mangachi
foal

calf is

about as big as a mule.

k'eukinan

nakoui

ass as for size foal is as big as an ass.

katta equal is

* Locative case.

EXEECISES.

193

EXERCISE

16 {continued).

I
mareuii as for horse

ri

4^1
chinaimyen
if

sarop three years

pass

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

lo.

16.

194

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise 17
^ao)
mousam
what
in

$!>fc
isso
is
is

A^t
yoranhan
riotous

^a**)
in

^^
1880
is

work

work
a

What
2.

the matter?

There

is

row

on.

^}l*l sarami
or

-rl^l
oumourei

n^'^
ppachyetta

man

A man

in well has fallen has fallen into the well.

ouei

why

ppachyesso has fallen How did he

sarami
fall ?

milchye

nemechyetta
fell

man pushed He was pushed over by

over

someone.

4.

t
mal pony

%
tal

^
ttai

4^1
torei*

^ia^y

ketch'yetta riding time stone struck against He struck against a stone while riding

keurek'ei

malkei

tterechyefcta
fell

thus

from horse
accordingly
fell

down

He

from his horse.

H4
ereum
ice

5!
The

^^^
and

t
pal

mitkeureoue being slippery

ice is slippery

^
^'^l
tami
wall
all fell

poutch'il sou foot joining means one cannot hold one's feet.

^4
epta not is

pika
rain

manhi

U HI

4^
oasye

-S^^'^ mounhechyetta
fell

many

came

in ruins

After the heavy rain the wall

down.

it
mokoun
coolie

-Iv^
poulle
call

kotch'ye

^^ ^^K
renew
ssaraira f build make to rebuild it.

Call coolies

and

tell

them

Locative case.

^Ssaraira

ssara hay era.

EXEPwCTSES.

195

EXERCISE

ir [cQutinned).

3.^
i

*a
il

^ichal well

5
mot
not

tou

mokouii
coolies

hao

this

two

work
coolies

make

These two
10.

do not work well.

^
sakton

3.^3,
ponaiko send and

cj-i

jLt

-Iv^ef
poullera
call

choue
given

wages

Pay them
11.

taran mokoun other coolies off and get other coohes.

mokoun
coolies

hanahei one

ton

eima

sik

chouo
give

money

how much

each

How much
12.

shall I give

each coolie?

4JI
oumoul
well

-J)
tai

7j^|
kiphi

5f?f
p'ara dig

p'anan
digcjing

place
well, dig

deeply
it

"When digging a
13.

deeply.

^J^l
kipkei

deeply

moul chal sosananta water well springs up dig If you dig deep, you will get plenty of w^ater.
p'amyen
if

11.

po-haing-koun

Syeoul-sye

narye

oatta

descended Seoul from foot-going cooHe The courier has come from Seoul.
15.

has come

echyekkeui yesterday

ttenasye departed
yesterday,

ouei

chikeum

oasso

why

now
only arrived

have come

He
16.

left

why has he

now?

y^]
neutkei
late

-^^
omyen if come
If

-&
ton

^^-f*i
kamhaye
reduced
cut his pay.

chouera
give

money
late,

he arrives

* Locative case.

19(5

'

COKEAN ^MANUAL.

EXERCISES.

197

EXEMCISE

18 (continued).

daj' after

naika morei ^o-morrow I

I shall call

ch'iiikoral

on

my

ch'acha kakeitta friend visit will go friend the day after to-morrow.

10.

O]
i

^13.7}
ch'inkoka

^i

^61)

this

taran kotei another friend in place This friend lives in anther locality.

4^
sao
lives

11

7}^
kanan
going

7^ 6|
kiri

^^3.^^y}7]0]^^
hemlniko mere dangerous and distant long and dangerous and
kaki going
difficult to go.

eryepta
difficult

road The road

is

''

"J-^
apheui
in front

7^*)
kangi
river
is

3!^
issye

mot
not

^^
kenne

y}
ka go

There
13.

across a river ahead which cannot be crossed.

being

\i]7}
pika
raiu

^ii
omyen if come

;^uj
kenne
across
it

7}^]
kachi

5
mot

^^
hao

If there is rain,

to go not cannot be crossed.

make

14.
tari

bridge

not

epko is and
is

There
15.

pai to epsani boat also not is neither bridge nor boat. "What

ettek'ei

hao

how
is

make
?

to be

done

haro one day

chyokhi kenne kakeitta pass will go able across If you wait a day, you will be able to get across.

chinaimyen
if

16.

^1
Syeoul Seoul

*i^^
yekeuisye from here many miles is

^
myen how many
it

^
ni

51

JL

toio

mile

become

How

from here to Seoul?

50

198

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise

19.

HH
yere
several

H
ni 7a *
It is

^i
an
not

5|v]
toini
;

chom
little

5|.f7^
ittaka directly
directly.

kakeitta
will

become no distance you

go

will

be there

t\l
taran

?lt]
kiri

<^x
epko
;

a^7^
cbeurem-kil

tF4:
ISSO
is

amotber

road
is

There

not is and no other road there

by-way
is

a short cut.

^6|
tan

^v^
olla

J.^
omyen
if

,1
kil

s4
kaki
chyot'a
is

moon

ascend
If the

comes

moon

rises, it will

road going be easy going.

good

t
chimi being heavy that package That package is heavy,

^> I
sarami

*l

>] ^1

keu

moukeoue

it

chichi mot one man to carry not needs more than one man to carry

ban

5 t^
hanta

make
it.

5.

tou-6

saram

two or more
Call

men

poulle chye having called carried

to take
it

kakera go

two or more men

away.

chyenyekei
at night

etai

where
will

ka go
for the

chakeisso
will sleep

Where

you go and. stay

night?

0]^]^^
etaitenchi

^^-^t
etououmyen
if

memeulkeitta
I {vill stay to get to at dusk.

wherever

dark

I will stay wherever I

8.

happen

^^J
makei
t

^^

^>7|4
matkyera
entrust

syoul

wine

ka potchim chal go booth baggage v/ell See to your baggage when you enter the inn.
teure enter

One

li is

equal, approximately, to one-third of an English mile.

Locative case.

EXERCISES.

199

EXERCISE

19 {continued).

moulken
articles

ta
all

chal well
all

touetta I have placed

I
10.

have taken charge of

the articles.

chikeum

ka
go

pap

now

Go now

food and get me

patpi chiera quickly prepare some food at once.

pap
food

mekeun
eaten

houei
after
I intend

nai
I

sanei
hill

olla

kakeitta
will

up
dinner.

go

going up the

hill after

12.

a
keu
that

4^1
sanei *
hill

^^
kounsa
soldier

51^
issye

chin
fort

4 ^^
ch'yetta

being
hill

has built

The
13.

soldiers

on that

have

built a fort.

yekeui here

k'eun
large

There
14.

to also is here a large

chyel

itko

amcha

to

itta
is

temple

and monastery and

is

shrine also also a shrine.

A^
pata
set.

7]-^]
kaei *

^4

^1
pai

chyekeun

4
sa,ng

H|<i
naiye take out

^^
onera

edge

hire small boat Hire a small boat at the seaside.

come

15.

nai I

hoa-ryoun-syenei *
fire-wheel-ship
I intend going

ollakakeisso
will

ascend

on board the steamer.

16
mil

pushing

mouri water

raanhi

many
tide is

The

teureoasye nakachi having entered to go out coming in and you cannot go out.

mot
not

hanta

make

* Locative case.

200

COREAN MANUAL.

EXEIiCIBE 20.
1

^ 4^ i^
k'eun
great
parai)i

poulmycii

H-t nakal
it

^>
mat
taste
is

'i^ epta
not
is

if blow wind going out There is no pleasure ni going out if

blowing.

2.

ti|
pi

^]

V|

7^

^ 'i

pyet nani kil ttenakeitta sunshine come out if stop rain road will depart I will start when the smi comes out arjd the rain stops.

kaimyen

^^

parameul wind

poni
see

As the wind
4.

is

onal to-day to-day

kakinan going
it

koankycich'iant'a

no concern

is

all

right for going.

%]0l^
nai-ireun

C^v^
chyengnyeng

^]7}
pika

^7\
olka come probable

JL^
pola
see

as for to-morrow

certainly rain It will certainly rain to-morrow.

6.

i- 1
kouram
cloud
If

Ji
if

pomyen
see

4
pi

-I
oi

4iL
cheungchyo
forecast

"k^l^}
alkestta will know to rain.

rain

coming

you watch the clouds you can

tell if it is

going

6.

>it
san
hill

-^^,|
Guei

6].^)

nj^l

pj^cf
tephita covers

aukai manhi above mist many A heavy mist hangs over the hills.

ankai miat

pcsyechimyen
if

nari

tepkeitta

undress will be day If the mist rises, the day will be warm.

warm

ttahi

ch'youkch'youkhani

ground

wet
is

The ground

damp

dial tointa koksik well become crops and there will be good crops.

Oppositive case

EXERCISES.

201

EXEBCISE

20 (continued).

4
10.

hou

14
tareun
is

^3.

^j=f

^1^

after

month Next month

chyangma tepko chinta rainy season carries hot and hot and the rainy season sets in.

ne

enchei

oannanya
?

keu
that

sai

ouei

ani

oannanya

you

when

came ^Vhen did you come

time

why

not

came

^Tay did you not come then ?

11.

mouet what

hakiro *

pochi
to see

mot
not

hayesso

making
"NMiere were

make

you that

I did

not see you?

12

*!
i

^-^^1
cheueumei
period

lAi
pounyohan

t^]
iri

5l^ ^1^
issye

this

I've been very

being work troublesome busy and have only just now come.

chikeum oasso now have come

^^

myen

h ow many days

How
14.

naheul manei oasso oasso four days period have come have come I have been here four days. many days have you been here ?
nal

manei

period

JL
o

4*^1
houei
after

44
naika
I

^J^l
chipei to house in the afternoon.

^}^^
kakeitta
will

uoon

go

I intend going

home

chokom
little

issamyen
if is

nachai

toikeitta
will

noon noon
in a
little.

become

It will be

16.

"^
nal

ofcf
mata
every

)J;)
nitchi to forget forget to

-^X
malko

^'-j

4^1
houei

^y^^
onera

sik

day

Don't

come

after food avoid every day after dinner.

come

* Instrumental ease.

51

202

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

21.

chyoung koiik Middle Nation

sarameun

lueri

kkakko
cut and

men

head

Chinese shave their heads, and,

2.

^^
Chyosyen Corean

^1-1-8:
sarameun

men

syangtou top-knot

4f

^^^
chchanta

weave

Coreans bind their hair up into a knot

8.

noun
eye

^4.*)
chyengsini

S^l-

He

chyoha melli ponta spirit being good far sees has good eyesight and can see a long way.

^H

^^\

noun
eye

chyengkeuika
spairit

H^y}
He

pouchyok
insufficient

44

hata

makes

has weak eyes

syokyengeun*
blind

pochi
to see

mot

hako

The

not blind cannot see and,

makes and

koui mekerinan * deaf man

teutchi to hear

mot
not

hanta

makes

The

deaf cannot h ear.

pengerinan*

mal

mot

hako

dumb
The dumb

speech not makes and cannot speak, and,

t
ancheul
sitting

panginan

tannichi

mot
not

room-man * to walk The lame cannot walk.

* Oppositivo

hanta

makes

case

EXEECISES.

203

EXERCISE
1 e|

21 {continued).

6^) meriei

on head

He
10.

koa ni oa hye ta patak hair is and mouth and teeth and ton^e surface all has hair on his head, a mouth, teeth, and a tongue.
t'el

t 5!^
itko

^J
ip

4 ^ 4^ ^ ^ ^
itta
is

Jkeu
that

^-8:*)
neulkeunika
old

^f-

^1
koui
ear
is

'la
mekko
eat

H
ni

5:
to

5^^
ppachyetta has fallen

man
That old

man

teeth also and both deaf and toothless.

11.

5 -fa
mal
speech
teutchi to hear

i\

^k
chal well
eat.

mot
not

hako make and

koki
flesh

mot
not

meknanta
eats

He
12.

can neither hear nor

^)5.
kouiro

S5.
mal

^a
meke
eats

with ear

One
13.

nai teutko k'oro matko hear and speech smell and with nose smell hears with the ear and smells with the nose.

ipeuro

mal

hako

eumsik

to

with mouth

also speech make and food One speaks and eats with the mouth.

14

7]

apheuko heri mok kich'am nako sore and loins neck cough come out and A cough induces pain both in the neck and

^a
to also
loins.

apha
sore

t
p'arei

^k

-^^
teunta
lifts

him
strength

issye
is

moukeon

in

arm

His arm

being heavy strong and he can lift

chal pack well a heavy weight.

chim

16.

nei

your

sont'opi chareuko nails fingers short and Your fingers are short but your nails are long.

sonkarak

kilta

long


204

COREAN

I^IAXUAL.

EXERCLSE

32.

kil

kanan

ttai

manhi

aissesso

road

many walking time suffered I have suffered much during the journey.

kil

melko

tto

hemhao

road

The
3.

long and also dangerous road was long and also dangerous.

>i]

^ ^ ^y
naika I
I

^1 -?maiou
very very tired
;

^tH
konhani
tired

^1

<^

5!

V^
is

chikeum

pouin pang

innanya

now

empty room
?

am

have you an empty room

*1
an
inside

^^1
pangei

^"i
sonnim

^^
issye
;

^}^^]
sarangei

4t-S^
*

guests being There are guests in the inner room

room

ryouhao drawing-room stay put up in the drawing-room

pangi

moutenhaye
;

chyokhi
able
it

ryouhakeisso *
will stay

this

room

comfortable I will take this room

is

all right.

6.

totchari

mat

chyengch'iant'a sai ket patkoua clean not is new article changed The mat is not clean bring a new one.
;

onera

come

7.

^4^
totchari

^^

^-^

H-l

^"^^

mat

chal p'yeko nipoul tephera well spread and blanket cover Spread the mat properly and put on a blanket.

3.

potchim baggage

pang room Take

anheuro
inside

my

teurye entered baggage inside the room.

onera

come

The

r is

more or

less

mute,

youhao,

etc.

EXEKCISES.

205

EXEBCISE

22 (continued).

poul
fire

ttaii-tenchi

an
not

ttaii-teiichi

koankyeicb'iant'a

burn whether
It

burn v/hether does not matter whether you hght a

no concern
fire

is

or not.

10.

teung

poul
fire
if

hyemyen
you
light
it

chyok'eitta
vTill

lamp

be good

It will be all right if

you

light a lamp.

nanan
as for

p'yengsangeisye *
level table

chom
little

noue
rested

chakeitta
will sleep a sleep.

me

I intend to lie

down

little

and have

tampai
tobacco

mekeun
eaten

ka noue go rested Take a smoke and then go to sleep.

houei
after

chao
sleep

13.

t
syoul

"-f'Hl makei f
booth

^^
mousam
what

j-|
mekeul

y]A)

JU.V|:
innanya
are

wine

What
14.

kesi eatable things have they got to eat in the inn ?

pap
rice

^Jsang

notk'o I syoul te table place and wine also Bring me dinner and some wine.

^^ t
pap
rice

kachye
bring

^N 4
oa

come

15.

chyouin master

poalle
call

kap
price

hoikyei

hayera

reckoning
bill.

make

Call the landlord

and pay the

IG
^J-

7)
kap

^
ta
+

^5J:^
;

"^ *d

^*ll:*1

y}JL
kao go

pap
rice

patasso tai-in p'yengani all have received great man price peacefully Your account is paid a pleasant journey, sir.

* Ablative case.

Locative case.

With an

aspirated root, a7id

k'o.

52

206

COKEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

23.

sa pang ira south east west north four regions are North, South, East, and West are the four points of the compass.

tong

4 ^

'^
nam

sye

pouk

>%

6)

2.

tong

4 4 T^
p'yen
side

^^1
sokei inside

5|
moi
hill

^>3
cheumsaing

y.^]t\
mohitR

syoup'oul
forest

east

There are many

assemble beast wild animals in the forests to the east.

^
sye

kouk
nation

^yt")
sarami

^i^
chyangsa

"i^i
manhi

^^^
hayetta

west

man
Western

trade many nations are large traders.

have made

nam
south

p'yeneuro
region

kamyen
if

^^
nari
is

te

tepta

go day If you go to the south the weather

more
warmer.

warm

-4
fouk
north

^0)
p"oungi

4V)77>^^

^6]

^]^^
is

wind
It is chilly,

pouni-kkanteuro nan blow because day as there is a north wind blowing.

ch'ioue cold

6.

k'eun
large

^ 4t
param wind
chyekeui
there

-t-l
poulmyen

^]7}

nakakeitta chal paika will go out well boat if blows If a strong wind blows the ship will go out well.

'i-7^^^

7.

ka go

Go
'8.

kachye tokkeui bring axe there and bring an axe.

7H

-2. *^
onera

come

naika
I

namoural

kkakkeitta
will split

wood
I intend

cuttmg some wood.

EXERCISES.

207

EXERCISE

23 {continued).

o]<\
etai

7f

V^
?

'J-

J: 3.
I

7} J.
kao

apheuro
before

where

go ^Vhere are you going

am

I go going in front.

10.

H'^l^^
etaisye

JLVi^
onanya

-]5.>^
touu'osye

^
onta

whence

come

Where do you come from ?

11.

from behind I come I come from behind.

^^1
nai

kyethai
side

tou

^fS saram
men
at

5!^
itta

my
12.

There are

two two men

are
side.

my

^5
as for

nenan you

^
nai

^ om
left

^<H)
p yenei
side

>tj?{syera

my
You

stand

stand at

my

left side.

13.

keu
that

sarameun

1-8: ^>l-e: *
man

Mi Ml
nai

-1^
orheun
right
at

^i ^^
p'yenei
side

my

syera stand

Let that man stand

14.
etai

my

right side.

ka
go
are

noue
rested

chao

chikenmemi

morokeitta

where

Where
13.

you

sleep going to sleep ?

as for the present I will not know I cannot tell at present.

^^^]
patpi quickly

^o\^
nirena
rise

^f^-)-^^
tarampakchil

-t*l4
hayera

run-action up Get up quickly and run.

make

16.
keriei

tarananan
riinnincj

>} a saram
men

i4
mant'a

street

many

There are a great many

men

in the street running.

Oppositive case.

Locative case.

208

COREAN

I\IANUAL.

Exercise
1.

34.

^
pouk
north

3^^l]

>i^|

^a
4>^J
cheumsaing
animals

^6]
-^4
mant'a

7jc|.
kipta

nopko sani kori p'yenei hills high and valley border There are high hills and deep valleys in the north.

deep

2.

7|
kak
each

^^
saik

3|
moi
hill

colour

many
of all kinds.

There aie many wild animals

3

j-e:
pemeuu
tiger

^7]
ssoki

^^3.
eryepko
;

chapki difficult and shooting bear catching Tigers are difficult to shoot bears are easy to catch.

^^
komeun
p'osyou

4?] ^j^
souipta easy

Chyosyeneun
Corea

* ch'ong

meimyen
if

ta

norat-hao

carry all hunter play the part of All Coreans carrying guns are considered hunters.

gun

6.

3l^2
chosim
care
_

"^

haye ch'ong chal nohara having made gun well fire Be careful and fire the gun properly.

4 4

jc-sf^

6.

^7^)4^
;

koankyeich'anso kekchyeng malko concern is not fear avoid Don't be alarmed there is no fear.

^^

"^3.

nai-il

nai
I

cheumsaing

to-morrow

am

chapeure animals to catch going hunting to-morrow.

kanta go

8.

morikoun
drivers

poulle
call

hamkkeui
together

ka go

Get drivers to go with me.

* Oppositive case.

EXEECIrtES.

209

EXERCISE
9.

24 {continued).

mekeul
eatable

kesal

chom
little

things

yeipihayera prepare
eat.

Prepare something to
10.

^
1011

0]
i

>^}l
saram

^o\
choue
given

y}7^
kachye
take

^\y^]^t^i\.
kakei-hayera

money

this

man

make go
to take.

Give some money to this

11.

man

^^l
sou-il

^<^]
houei
after

sef
tora

-^^2.^
okeisso

some day

back I will come I will be back in a few days.

12.

nai
I

well house Look properly after the house when I

after

kan gone

houei

chip

chal

poara
look

am

away.

13.

^i'i^
sanyang hunting

kasye having gone

^H
ta
all
;

^^l cheumsaing
animals

^l^I
manhi

4^1

-^

many
hunting.

chapchio catch please

Good
14.

sport to you

when

chim
baggage

siressini

Let us go
15.

have loaded the baggage has

all

kapsyeita us go been packed.

let

nai I

koukyeng

karyehanta

am about to go sight-seeing I am going to take a walk.

16.

>m
hill

-1*^
olla

:'>^
kamyen
if

sanei *

koukyeng

i-4

vt4
mant'a

There

is

sight-seeing an excellent view from the top of the

* Locative case.

up

go

many
hill.

53

210

COREAN

i\tANUAL.

Exercise
1.
i

25.

^
eun

chyoung this silver how many ounces heavy are How many ounces does this silver weigh ?
nyaiig

myet

^ ^

'>]

chyeoul
scale

kachye onera tara brought come having weighed Bring the scales and weigh it.

poara
see

tara

poncheuk
seen

neng

nyang chyoung

io
is

weighed

The

four ounces heavy scale shows four ounces in weight.

keu
that

kapsai
for price

p'aimyen
if sell

ton

mitchio

I will lose
5.

money

if

lose I sell at that price.

money

ena

kesi

ihanka *

moure

poara
see

what

profitable thing inquired Ascertain which is profitable.

Chyosyen Corean

toni

ihao
is

yang-eun-chyeni

ihao
profitable

cash

Which
7.

more

profitable foreign silver money profitable, Corean cash or dollars ?

chikeumeun
as for

herhaye ika epta being cheap profit not is As dollars are cheap at present no profit can be made.
yang-eun-chyeni
,

now

dollars

yang-eun-chyen
dollar

ban
one

ouen
get

kasye

Go and
*

me

gone change

patkooa changed
for a dollar.

onera

come

Ka

in

ihanka

whether.

+Numerative

of dollars.

EXERCISES.

211

EXERCISE

25 {continued).

elleun quickly

naka
go out

eun

kap

ara

poko

onera

silver price

know
as to

Go
10.

quickly and bring

me word

see and come the price of silver.

kapsal
price

alketeun
if

know

Let

me know

naikei cheuksi alkeihayera directly to me make know directly 5'ou ascertain the price.

"

7|
kap
price

4
chom

i^i
te

jl^l JL

<i

posio more see please little Please give a little

chyeoul here scale more the scales here are heavy.

3-ekeui
;

5!

;^ -I

/^(
is

x\

innan being

syeita

strong

12.6]^
iren

-f-s]
ou-p'i

^ ^]^ ^1^ 7^\ tyx ^ myet keun

inya
are

yere

chyeoul

io

such

ox hide how many catties

How many
13

catties are these

hide?

several scales They are very heavj'.

are

yangmok

piece goods

hako patkocha with let us exchange Let us exchange the beans for whatever piece goods there are.
p'iri

myet

toi-tenchi

k'ong

how many

bales

become whether beans

"44 44
motemi moulkeun
all

^-8:
;

kachye pyer-ean oaya * seult'a patkooa k'ongeun chounta come changed as for beans refuse special silver brought I give I do not want beans bring gold and I'll exchange with you.
>

^H

4*1=

1k^^

^^

articles

kapsi price

ta
all

pis-ssasye

being dear

heungchyeng hal sou epso trade making means not is

all

One cannot do any

16.

business, as prices are

too high.

>^-^ :^}^

^^1}

4^

77 >)

'^^l^di

hataka chyangsa ponchyen kkachi syekyou epsechyesso trade when making capital until kerosene disappeared His capital disappeared when he was in the kerosene trade.

Ya added

to the perfect participle has the sense of

"having only,"

"if only."

212

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

26.

chyechaei
to

naka
go out

iren

moulkeneul
article

sa

onera

shop

Buch

buy
article.

come

Go
2

to the shop

and buy such an

>t
so

7l

4^
pan keun

^V -^ ji ^i
sa

koki
flesh

ox

oko half catty buy come and

Buy
3.

half a

pound

to chom sa fruit also little buy of beef and also some fruit.
silkoa

4 5: 4 4 ^
7j-/^|

sf

onera

come

J:

>^]^|
sisyei

MV ^

^1
yei

0^

^ >fc

tterechyesso kapsi yes has fallen price cotton goods price Do you know the price of cotton cloth ? Yes the price has fallen.
;

p'omok

teurennanya have heard

..

*^^*|

-i^l
manhi

$\a^

7j-^|

H]J^
maiou
is

4A
ssao
is

kapsi p'ek oasye yangmoki piece goods abundant many having come price With a large import of piece goods the price

very low very low.

5.

myenchou
silk

^^ ^^
nemou
too

314
pis-ssa

4^]
sachi to buy
:

5
mot
not
it.

hanta

The

silk is

dear too dear

make

I cannot

buy

7J-4S:
kapsanan as for gauze

s^l^i^
chyoch'iank'o

^1^-^
pitaneun
silk
is

bad and as for The gauze is bad and the silk

chom moth

4^5!^ 4
mekesso
has eaten

moth-eaten.

7.

4^
so

'i^'^ ^>fc
elmana
isso

kachok
skins

ox

how many

are

How many

ox hides are there?

3| i^l -fmanhi p'l ou many ox skins There are many ox hides.

isso

are

^3]
tonp'i sable

7J-4
kapsi
price

'i^}^ elmanya
how much
is

'?]-?maiou

^^v^
;

^}^]JL

What

is

the price of sable ?

noukeuni sasio cheap very buy please Very cheap buy, please.

EXERCISES.
EXEllCISE 26
{continued).

21i

9JL
p'yo leopard

3|
p'i

^^*|
pari foot

^>t

J^

7MI

cpso keu kosi koaiikyeich'iant'a not is that thing concern not is skin There are no claws to the leopard's skin. That does not matter.

4^MI

11:4

10.

ho
tiger

itko cliyckeun kct p'i k'eun kct to manhi to small thing also many skin large tiling also is and There are large tiger skins, but there are many small ones.

isso
is

kcu
that

kapsainan

p'alchianso
;

chom
little
it

te

sell not to price as for make I cannot sell at that rate

more

chousio give please

little

more, please.

12.

^^4^1

6].

>t

M| 7|naika
I

3!^
nrtchye
losing

45^
p'anan
selling

7\^]^
kesio

pis-ssachianso

dear not
It is

money
it

thing

is

not dear.

am

selling

at a loss.

33.
p'alki

selling

keumantouera seulk'cteun let alone if refuse If you don't want to sell, all right.

ssaii

kosi

anita
is

cheap
It is

thing not not a cheap article.

14

6]
i

^
sai

6|

^^^

5jc^

v^

^^^1*14
3!^f4
pis-ssata

this

period

hanya pyenpyench'iant'a ette ch^iangsa how make good not is trade How is business at present? Not good.

15.

4
cun
silver

-'l^
kapsan
as for price The price of

^31

noukko yangmokeun cheap and piece goods as for silver is low and piece goods are

"M-^

dear
dear.

is

IG
p'okouei in port

Merchants

mohye sero tat'oa p'alko santa traders assembled each other strive sell and buy crowd to the port and compete with each other in business.
chyangsaka

From
54

kapsai (locative case), with nan (oppositive case ending) added.

214

COEEAN MANUAL.

iXERCISE)

"4/.

1.

^ Atasat
five

A
kachi kinds
taste

cL

t}
ta
all

e^l

5.

nV
mal
speech

jr.

i^

5f

massal

cb'ai'yeiio

hay era

one bv one

make

Name
2

the five tastes one by one.

^>

1
l^t
massal
tastes

^J:

tr *J

^>

^^1-$:

^^^1 JL

maion niiissio tan mat ssemi mat cbchan mat renin mat acrid taste is sweet taste bitter taste salt taste sour taste There are sweet, bitter, salt, sour, and acrid flavours.

3.^]^
iren

^4
tasat
live

ti'i
etten

'"-t'^l

3.

71]

^
V\

7]
mix

such

yakeinan korokei some in medicine as for equally

syekkera

Mix
4.

these five flavours equally ni

some medicine.

>^}|n|,i^
saram

^j-e:^-tS.^Vi:il^7n

man

massal korokinan la mata ipcmi kathato 11 all each as for mouth same though taste as for distii ction Though men have mouths alike, they all differ as to fiavoui-s.

lalla
dij'fer

s.f-S.

i^a
Honey
is

^}r

^3.

^^^
-5-^
X3

^1
is

kkoureun talko as for honey sweet and

seuiko ch'onan hoch'onan as for vinegar sour and as for pepper sweet, vinegar sour and pepper pungent.

maipta
acrid

6.

pata
sea

H
silkoa
fruit

chchako saiam moureuii as for water salt and spring as for water Sea water is salt and spring water is tasteless.

moureun

^4

^]-5L

^^

seumkcpta
insipid

^^

7.>^^4

^r^
talmyen if sweet
Fruit

^4 y]^]^
nikeun
ripe
if

kesio
is

seuimyen sen
if
if

^t^
sour

y^^]^.
kesira

sweet

thing is ripe, but

unripe

thing

is

sour unripe.

-6}Ml
kkotch'an
as for flower

^3.

$Ja

hyangnai nako etten p'oureun naiamsai perfume arise and some as for weed stench Flowers smell sweet, ))ut certain weeds give a bad odour.

f^

M|6}A)j

v^c^
nanta
arises

EXi^iiLlhES.

215

EXERCISE

27

{continued).

p'oureuii

green

ket nourcmi ket pouikeun ket beum kct kemeiui kesio thing white thing black thing yellow thing red thing is There are green, yellow, red, white, &ud black (colours).

10

4 ^U
pomeinan
soutch'an *

"^ 7j namki

4 ^ ^f 4 ?f -I ^U T^ 4 ^ ^1
p'ouratal^a

-S.

kaeureinan

noureuu

pitch'io

as for in spring tree as for in autumn green is yellow colour is In spring the trees arc green, but in autumn their colour is yellow.

"tl: 7\^^ kemeto

12.

poulkko cliainan * heuita cliarcoal black though fire red and ashes white Though charcoal is black, the flames are red and the ashes white.
poul
kkotcli'an flower
*

4,^^
^1
pitch'i

^3. 4lr

f|^

iL>^
Chyosyeu Corean

4 -^ t 31 ^ euipokemi heum
a.s

7|

S:^] ^^
osi
+

mank'o

kemeuri

chj'ekta

black for dress white colour many and clothes Cortans wear mostly white clothes, seldom black.

small

13.

JL
o
five
,

i
saik
ti]

^}J]
patkeui besides

pitch'an pyello colour another as for colour specially There are no special colours besides these five.
taran

m
A

^^ ^^
7|

<^J:.
epso not is

14.

6]
i

cv

J.
o

4|

7|

^
6j-^}j

5|

-f-

6^

ef

])itan

this

Keep

kak saikeul kak nanhoa touera each each five colour divided silk place these five kinds of coloured silk distinct from each other.
V}]

1-511
pitch' an

^^3. l^-fjl
nouneuro by eye

3.3:.

3I-4
matba
smell

as for colour

We
i
kkotch'an
as for flower

pounpyelhako naiamsai k'oro distinguish and odour by nose distinguish colour by ihe eyes smells by the nose.
;

^1 ^^
koheun
pretty

31
pit

^ ^3. ^H
to also

^
to also

\1:4
nanta
arises

itko

colour is and Flowers look pretty and smell fragrant.

hyangnai perfume

* Oppositive case.

Properly

oti,

but read osL

216

COREAN ^MANUAL.

EXEIICTSE 28.

mal
horse

manlii niekiinyeii pori sal if feed mauy barley flesh If you give the pony plenty of barley, he will grow

cliiiita

makes
fat.

^J
chip straw

JJL -S. ^i ^J koa pori ban syem sa onera barley hundred bundles and one bag buy come Buy one bag of barley and 100 bundles of straw.
^-]

5 4

^}

ef

paik

iiiont

3.

onal to-day

nat

liouei

naika
I

mal

t'ako

etai

cbom

kakeitta
will

noon
I

after

am

horse ride and where little going out a little this afternoon on horseback.

go

mapou
groom

tarye
to

mal
"horse
Tell the

ancliaug saddle

cliieurako *

hayc a
say

groom

carry" to saddle the pony.

seuikol

province

Go

ka sasye k'ong malkkeui sire oUye oa go beans having bought on hor^e loaded nscended come and buy beans in the covmtry and bring them up on ponies.

chim
load

pourye oatketeun kokkanei teuriko sak choucra have come in granary unloaded enter and hire give Put the goods into the granary when they come, and pay the hire.
ta
all
if

^ ^ ^
tan nyang
five

*f

i"
is

i.
yel

chyekta

nyang

He

is small says five nyang

hako says and

nyang man tallahao ten nyang only demands too little, and wants ten nyang at least.

f^-fJ.
^f
51 '^

^ ^ ^a
yen
six

saksi chyeke nyang mot patkonan nyang receive-and-as-for price being small not

^|>^M H 5

T Jl
hao

kakeitta

He

says he won't go even for 000

will go says cash, as the hire is too small.

Ko

is

used to indicate the end of a quotation.

EXERCISES.

217

EXERCISE

28

{continued).

^^<^]
Chyosyenei in Corea

-^i-^ koksikeun
grain

Hi:
yesat
five

7f^l
kachika kinds

71-

vt'^
iianta

produce

Coroa produces
10.
ssal rice

five different

kinds of grain.

koa k'ong koa p'at koa and beans and peas and

pori

oa

mireul

heuni

mekso
eat

barley

Bice, beans, peas, barley,

and wheat mostly and wheat are mostly eaten.

"

"^
mil

^^5.
karo
flour

t
ban
one

^J
syem

44

'^f p'arataka

^f

"^4
ttek

sieil^
mantalkeitta
will
flour.

wheat

bag having bought bread I I intend making bread when I have bought a bag of

make

seuikol

saram

province

man

The
13.

pori kananhaye oa kouiri man meke being poor barley and oats only eat country people are poor and can only eat barley and oats.

nipssal nengnekhaye koa p'at man meke sarameun Syeoul being sufficient shelled rice and peas only eat as for man Seoul The people in the capital being well-to-do can live on rice and peas.

14.^5:41-1
pouk
to

4^
4
of

^3.^1
V

^^
-

i^)

i-J^
hao

momil kamcha oa nongsa manhi saramteul and buckwheat agriculture many potato north province men In the north the people cultivate potatoes and buckwheat.
15

make

paich'you

4 4
oa

-f
mou

4
kya

5|.

^61|

oa

nianal
garlic

p'anan

X^t^
nanta produce

ttangeisye

cabbage

and turnip and

and from eai-th onion Cabbages, turnips, garlic, and onions are grown.

16.

poksyonga oa kyoul ta oa kam koaneungkeum koa pai peach and orange all persimmon and apple and and pear There are pears, persimmons, apples, peaches, and oranges.

7^

4 ^ ^ 4 4# ^V ^ t

"^ 5l '^
itta

are

55

218

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise
^V
pat
field

20.

7^3.
kalko
till

7}^
kacul

Ji?|
pori

>J1H4 simera
sow
barle}\

and barley autumn Plough the land and sow antunni

2-

7}-^
kaeul

jte|
pori

4 pom
is

Ji.5)

Jlf

vjcf

autumn barlej' The autumn

spriiip^

barley

natta potam pori is superior barley more superior to the spring sowing.

mil

kaeurei
in

simcuko
is

k'ong

pomei
in spring in spring.

smieunta

wheat

autumn

Wheat

beans sow and sown in autumn and beans

sow

koksiki crop

epso ta kekcliyeug pailsyengi jdl anxiety not is people [The people are free from care if they have good crops.
chal well
if

toimyen becomes

5.

chyen nyeneun

* hyoungnyen teurcsso itteni oreun p'oungnyen entered famine full year former year was but this year Last year there was a famine, but this year there are full crops.

6.
i

this

hao nemou kameure sichyeri chal mot toil-teut sai crops well not become likdy make period too much being dry It is too dry at present and there is every chance of bad crops.

'

-^i^]
orei

this

hyoungnyen toimyen year scarce year if become

If there is a

f ^ ^^
famine

-tl
koulme
sta,rved

choukeul saram about to die men

^1

^f I

"J^
mant'a

many

tiiis

year,

many

will die of starvation.

monchye tareun
previous

i kameulteni tareun haro pika o kenne this moon was dry but one day across rain comes Last month was dry, but this month there was rain every other day.

moon

* Oppositive case.

EXEKCTSES.

219

EXERCISE

20 {continued).

^o]
iiari

J:

5^^

ti]7f

4-^}.

jic].
pota
I see

day

olka beuryesye pika being cloutl}'' coining likely rain The day is cloudy and it looks like rain.

10.

k'eun
great

param
Avind

poultcni

n(;un

sa

m^eneuro

narakanta
fly
all

A
11.

blew but fiiow four faces strong wind blew and the snow was driven in

away

directions.

i
^}

6|

nari

day

clouds weather being high AVith a clear sky and high clouds thQ weather

^1 uL malkko clear and

i- I

*|

kourami

^4
noplia

^a^
ilkeuika

7f

^^
is

-f

syeneurhata
refreshing
is fine.

1 2.

n|.

^
ttai

ti)

7|.

_6

oj. 7).

^] '^ ^)

3i

c|

otaka kaimyeu hai pit tteukepta te rainy season time rain having come if stops sun colour more is warm If it clears up during the rainy season, the sun is all the hotter.
pika

chyangma

olchekei moucliikei penkai oa ourei sj-eko hao coming time rainbow stand and lightning and thiinder makes AVith a shower there comes the rainbow, with thunder and lightning.

syonaki

shower

pyerakeul penkai oa noisyeng nouika machyetta hateni hao who thunderbolt has met lightning and thunder made but says He says somebody was struck with lightning during the thunderstorm.
15.

'I

kang mouri ssotachiko eresso ch'ioue river water pour out and was frozen weather being cold hailstones DuriiifT the cold weather there v/as a fall of hailstones and the river froze.
ilkeuika

7f ^)

^^-1oupaki

*|

'^l-^]

3,7}^'>]^t^

IG.

param wind

ereum cheuch'ire mot onikka ice not having come to slide I could not go skating on account of the snow and the wind.
poulko

nouni

blow and

snow

kao go

* Instrumental case.

220

COREAN

lytANUAL.

Exercise

30,

nfef
ereum
ice

ppachilka nycmnye toutlieouni hachi falling anxiety to make being thick Don't be afraid of falling, for the ice is thick.

niara avoid

2.

dj.6,]
pamei
in night

ti]7|pika
rain
fell

$\^ ^^1
oasye
ttahi

^c].6|
taitani

5ja^o|.

Eain

mitkeurepta exceedingly having come ground is shppery during the night, and the ground is very slippery.

7}^
moul
water

Jl^^
onera

HJ
nai
I
I

^I
syei

^
syou

t ^
liakeitta

^f

kachye brought Bring

come

me some

water

want

to

wash wash

hand

will

make

my

hands.

4.6]
i

^6]
mouri water

;^>1*>1:'H
chyengcli'ianini

^*h
ssota
;

this

clean not

is

This water

is

not clean

poured throw

naiye taken out

it

^^

^?1sf
parycra

throw away

away.

5.

^'^]
tokei in jar

moureun

^^
syouken

:S.^:^heuriko cloudy is
is

^'^]
pyengei

moureun

^^

f^
malkta

The water

as for water in the jar

dirty,

in bottle as for water is clear but that in the bottle is clean.

pinou soap

nok'o t'ongei teon moul katta pouera and place in tub gone hot water towel and pour Get soap and a towel, and put hot water in the bath, oa

nai
I

konhanikka
tired because

onareun
tired

as for to-day

am

and

ilcheuki nouechakeitta early will sleep will go to bed early to-day.

pangei
in

room

yo p'yeko touichipe kkarara spread and mattress reversed spread Spread the bed on the floor and turji the mattress over.
chari

mat

EXEECISES.

221

EXERCISE

30 {continued).

9.

e|

c^

JL

v]

chad mat

tereoni dirty

The mat

is dirty;,

ef '^i jL })atkoa kkalko nipoul p'yera sai ket new thing changed spread and blunket spread get a new one and put a blanket over it.
/}j
:7j

^a

>]

v]

^^

nai-il

to-morrow

ilcheuki cii'ainAeihakeitta kkaiouera ketong nai early awaken I royal procession will participate Call me early to-morrow I assist at the Koyal Procession.
;

tongchi
solstice

tal

tongchi
solstice
sacrifices

moon

The King

banta naranimkomi chyeisa nal sacrifice makes king day on the occasion of the winter solstice.

keu
that

sai min sotongi taitan hayetta hao kanei period pejple among disturbance exceedingly made says He says that there was then much excitement among the people.

ettek'ei

arasso

p'yenchi
letter
? I

how

How

knew do you know

had

to poke si;nioun to teuresso also see and rumours also heard letters and I also heard rumours.

"-'I

mm

7i^|
kanei

>fe-f -f

t-B:
mareun

^
ta

a-k
miteul

"r
sou

^Jb
epso not is

sotonghanan

people

among

disturbing speech all reliable means Reports current among the people are never to be believed.

15.4 $^6)
koanoueni

^^

^ ^^^^yts.3.
^} ^^I kouni elma
-fv^
moUye

)} J:

tasarinikkanteuro chal mot minyo nasso official rule because well not revolution arose The people rebelled on account of the oppression of the ofticiak.

10.7] i\^]
keriei

i-Ti
koukyeng

4^^)
syennanchi stand whether

J2.5.
moro

in street

sight-seeing persons how many driven I cannot tell how many spectators were collected in the

know not

street.

56

222

COREAN MANUAL.

ExEliCISE

31.

I
null

^14
anchaiig saddle

^l-^:
chieuii

4^1
houei

I
mal

^^ 4
kellyera

horse

carry after horse Lead- the horse round after saddling.

walk

ttam sweat

heiillyessini

flowed
It is

achik petkichi saddle as yet remove perspiring; don't take off the saddle yet.

anchang

mara
avoid

param wind
If the

ssoimyen
if

mal
horse
it

pyeng

tuelki
ill.

sVioot

pony catch cold

sickness entering will be sm-e to be

is

souipta easy

moukeoun chim
heavy

The

load on horse load heavy packages put on a bull, the light ones on a pony.
light

srtko sokei load on bull load I'lnd

kapayaon

chim malkei

sirera

0.

onal to-day

kil

road

Where

etaicheum kasye memeulkeisso whereabout gone depart will stop will you stop on the road if you start to-day?

ttenamyen
if

7f^4 ^ t t
.

-^

^I^^"^ 4^1-4.
chachio
sleep

issamyen chyenghan syoul mak kataka if be wine booth clean going when I will rest wherever I find a clean inn.

7.

chini

pack

ponaiko mal monchye sireun send and before horse loaded Send the pack ponies on ahead, and

ouri
Y^(j

touri

tonghainghaye

toui

ttarakanta
follow

two "We two

behind accompany wiJi follow up together after.

EXERCISES.

223

EXERCISE
9.

31 {continued).

:3.

5I
etchi

6]

6^ ^4 ^q

^A ^\
*^^1

7f 5^ -t

JL

keu
that

sarami

man
That man

karyehao oiial oasye ecbekkeui is about to go came to-day yesterday came yesterday and intends to leave to-day.

10.

55^1
wherefore

^\^
onareun

^^1 A^]
nacbai

^V^
isso
is

How

was

to-day it that you

noon came when

kyeioue exceeded
it

oannanya yekeui have come here was past noon to-day V

ach'amei
early

man kyereuri i ttai patpouko time only leisure this busy and I was busy in the morning and only now found time.

12.

01

t\

-f

;^

v^

61)

7|-i

53 c|

-f J^

chyenyekei kamycn ette hako hao ta il in evening if go how make work all make and How about going in the evening after finishing the work ?

13

-^^-8:
onareun

714
kyereur

'iJ^t.H
;

^1

*i

4^

5|7^I

tjSL
hao

nai-il oasye hoikyei epsani to-morrow came accounts is not leisure as for to-day come to-morrow and settle accounts. I have no time to-day

make

nanan taran kananya tai ch'youriphakeitta neuan koukyeng as for me other place go will saunter as for you sight-seeing Are you going for a walk ? I am going somewhere else.

nai chyen nyenei seuikol

kattaka

pan nyen manei

olla

oasso

half year period gone up came I former j^ear province Last year I went to the country but came back after six months.

nei

you da^

tasi pomyen chasyeihi again if see distinctly Will you be able to recognise me when you see
il

houei
after

naral

alkeinnanya
will

me

know

me

again ?

224

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

33.

this

poi linen

oa

and See whether

iiioumyengi cotton
this linen

chyoheuiika

poara
look

good whether

and cotton are good.

2.
i

moumyengeun
cotton

this

fine
is

kaneulko and

chye
is

poinan
linen coarse.

This cotton

that fine and that linen

koulkta eoarse is

mosi
grasscloth

myet

chanka

chaiye
?

poara
look

this

how many feet being measured How many feet does this grasscloth measure

keu
that

sarameul

namou

karioue

pochi

mot
not
trees.

hata

man
I

trees could not see the

having hidden to see man, he was hid by the

make

^*]
nouni
eye

^^]
keunsi

-fd
hamyen if make
if

^^1
keunsi

Ivvengeul

^1

4tJL
sseuo use

short sight Use spectacles

f pecti.cles short sight you are short-sighted.

p'ai-moul jewel things

chyenei

ka
go

ankyengeul
spectacles

sa

onera

shop

buy

come

Go
7.

to the jeweller's

shop and buy spectacles.

mouesitenchi whatever

kesal chyoheun article good Buy whatever is good.

sa

onera

buy

come

chyekeui
there

mousam
what
is

What

mouesal ch'aseo yekeui irio pol what here seek woi'k is seeing there to see there? What are you looking for here?

Chanka contracted

for

cha

(foot)

and inka

(is

it?).

EXERCISlilS.

225

EXEBCISE

32 {continued).

a
keu
that

<i3L^
yeiikoro

^l%t
oueiit'oiic^ban

"^-I/^J^l

^vl4

On
10

paiksyengi nmnt'a mnrmuring people are many reason that account there is much discontent among the people.

Icoanoaeni
officials

paiksyengi kitke tasarimyen chal people pleased if i:;overn well If the officials rule well, the people are happy.

haye

make

koanoueni
officials

hile people hurt If the officials don't rule properly, tlie people suffer injury.

chal well

m(jt

tasarimyen
if

paiksyengi

poutaitkita

not

12.

a.
keu
that

^f>]<A]
saiei

^H/i
he3-echin

M]^|'|
paiksyengi people

i4
mant'a were many

time

At that time many

13.

separating of the people fled away.

koanoueni
officials

choi
fault
officials

The

hayesso p'achik issye have made degraded having being in fault were degraded.

u.^f

^t kananhan
poor

>> I

6|

4s

4;^

-f

v^ ;*^

4Hj

x\

The
15.

chinaita hamyen chal pass well make if active men is though poor will be able to exist if they are industrious.

saramirato

poucharen

keieran
idle

saraineun

mattangi

kananhao
poor

properly Idle people deserve to be poor.

men

16.

pouchareni
actively

pel chounta keieramyen hamyen syangkeup patko give punishment lazy if and receive reward make if

I reward the active

and punish the

lazy.

57

226

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise

33.

nai chip chieuryeliaiii moksyou poulle euinonliayera I house am about to make carpenter call consult arrange with the carpenters. I am going to build a house
;

2.

^1
I

chaimok
materials

^ 4 -I
all

cf. 6^1 )

-f ^.^1 v|

^;c^
before

ta koa to! and stone all

yeipihayessini
;

ton monchye

^^
chouo
give

have

prepared the materials and stones ready

money
advance

me some money.

p'ako k'eun tol nohara niokoun poullesye ttang kipkei dig and big stone place coolies having called earth deeply Get coolies, dig the fomidations well down, and put in big stones.
.

patkeui outside

ssako an tamemi heulkeuro si-tna tanieun * pyektollo with mud with brick build and inside wall build Vr'all Make the walls of brick, but use mud for the partitions.

mokoun
coolie

il

man

cbal

work only well

hamyen if make

syangkeup reward
if

pateurira
will receive
Vvell.

The

coolies will only get a gratuity

they work

onal
to-da,y

manil
if

pi

om3^en

tam
if

ssaclii

mara
avoid

rain

come

Don't build the wall to-day

wall to build it should rain.

il

chal

hayessini
;

mokoun
coolie

has made work well They have worked well

sak chouko syoiil kaj) te chouo wages give and wine price more give give the coolies their pay and a pourhoire.

hai

sun

toteul rising

ireul ilcheuki nirena sichakhayera ttaiei work early rise begin time Get" up at sunrise and set about your work early.

* Oppositive case.

EXERCISES.

227

EXEBCISE

33

(c-ontimied)

keu
that

kitong
pillar

Put
10.

pitkoureiuii slanting that pillar up straight

little

choui

kotkei upright
;

syeiouera
erect

it

is

slanting.

>^

syekkarai

kesaro * chaimolceul ta koteun haj'^era all materials straight thing rafter and make Put the rafters and all the other beams properly straight.

4?^

^'^f

i4^ 1 ^^ 4
poulle
call

7| >t

it

i ef

oa

taran other

1.

kaioachyaiigi

kioa
tile

brickman

Call a bricklayer

and

tantani firmly roof the house properly.

niera

connect

chipong
roof

nieumyen saiki pi mot chal if connect rain leaking not well If the roof is not properly put on it will leak.

souipta easy

13.

^1^J=*'1
michyangi
plasterer

-1^1
poulle
call

^'^l
tamei

'^^l
myenhoi

i-<^4
hayera

lime on wall Call the plasterer and plaster the walls.

make

pyekeun

partition

syekke heulkeul paHara oa hoi mix mud plaster and lime Piaster the wall with lime and mud mixed together.

15.

4i
chipi

sapyek mortar several

^ myet

4^ 4^
pari

7>
ka go

-^fj
ouheui above
it

f "i-ef
pallara plaster

sata

loads buy Get several loads of mortar and plastdr

over.

16.

tomochi
altogether

myet

kan

inya

hyeiye

poara
see

house

is count how many kau How many rooms are there? Count and see.

* Instrumental case.

228

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

34.

syarangei
in

soniiimi

teuressini

poul
fire
;

chom
little

tteiiyera

drawing-room guest Light a fire

have entered in the drawing-room

light

guests have come.

namou wood

epsani not is

There

is

ponaiye han mon/^ shop having sent one bun no wood; send to the shop and buy .i
kakaei
'

koult'ong

chimney

nopkei highly

ssamyen
if

yenkeuika

ch-;i

...1,

build

The chimney

will

smoke draw well if you

we
build
it

nigli.

ko'ilt'ong

nacheumyen
if

yenkeui

syevmta
rivet (turns back)

cliiumey If the chimney

is

low low it

srnoke will fill the

room with smoke.

taichyangchyangi

oasye

moun

chameulsoi
lock

pakcina
to nail

hayera

big workman came door Tell the blacksmith when he

make
on the doors.

comes
aj-

to fix the lucks

6.

ti|

^j: 6|

^
5:
to

v|

4
Hj

5.

-f 6|

pang hayera ta topai paper-hanger call room all paper-hanging make Call the paper-hanger and have the whole house papered.
topaicliyangi

poulle

7.S31
chyoheui
pape-if

4 f
oa

;J>tv|
epsani

6^

.
tou

jyi}^
kachi

^1-4
sa

p'oul

nai-il

oa

and batter also not is kinds to-morrow two There is neither paper nor paste. Buy both to-morrow.

buy come

^^ V ^ S S| 5.
*

'r

^31

^ol) f

S f|

^^ vf

inonchye nachan chyohjuiro * pareuko houei taran chyoheui palla fi];st low paper smear and after smear other paper Use cheap paper for the first coat, and other paper for the second.

Instrumental case.

EXEELi.^r..-^.

2-29

EXERCISE
9.

34 {continued).

onal to-day I have

10.

taikameul

choiu

poiopcha

let us visit excellency little come to-day to pay my respects to

saj'

hako and

oasso

have come

Your Excellency.
oJ:
is

6)
i

^
sai

0)

"i J]

7} ^]

ri^

i* i 5^

-f

Jl

ilkeuika
v\-eather

this

period

ch'ioun-tai cold time

nyenhaye
consecutive

p'yenganhao
well
?

How

have you been keeping during these cold days

"

t^l
yei

^^
nanan
as for

^i
chal well

5l^f^ manan
isso
is

l-fe
taikeun

^^
ette

i-Jt
hao

yea

only Yes, I've been very well; but

me

as for sir how how are yoa, sir?

make

'^

J.^-^
onareun

^^y}
syerika

-}^
manhi

oasye frost many having come as for to-day To-day there was a severe frost, but it was
13.
irek'ei

4^

^^)^
nachaioan
as for noon warm at noon.

^^
tepta
is

hot

ch'acha
\nsit

okinan

thus

coming

YoHir calling in this

way

is

in tteut patktui work thought outside more than I could expect.

o
is

1^

H^4
ye-pora look here
chyoucb3'enchaei
kettle

tampai

^'^l
!

pout eh* ye

^^

-^^ oko
come and
and bring

tobacco

Here
15.

join light his pipe

ch'a tea
tea.

4 ^^^taryera infuse

^^i;^^)
+

chyoheun syoul poue good wine pour Put good wine in the kettle and heat

^t t 4H
syoul koa wine with
different
;

i
it.

*i

teiyera

beat

16.
i

syoureun

this

wine

taran oiher
is

talla
differ
it

tokchiant'a

poisonous not

is

This wine

is

not strong.

* Oppositive case.

Locative case.

53

230

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

35,

y]^
kere

y}t "^^
kamyen
tari

"J-sa
apheuko sore and

t
pal

s.

-r

on

foot

By

if go leg foot going on foot your legs will be sore and your

poureutt'e to also blistered feet blistered.

^^^

^4-e:
cheykeun
small

^i-l
sineul

-^lA-^
smeumyen
if

t<>|

pan chointa feet shoe squee>ze If you wear small shoes your feet will be sore.
shoes

^]
1

^} I
sarami

^1

^^^]

J5l *]

:^^j=-f^
kenchyanghata
strong

this

man

momi salchiko flesh carry and body This man is stout and stronef.
6.

4.

JX
keu
that

A
man

^e|
p'arihako
lean makes and That man is lean and
w^eak.

6|
raomi body

^^

^4
'f^

saraiaeun

yakhata

weak makes

5.

^^1
momei

JL-Si
ohan

H-:a
nako

penyelhako tou t'ong nako chill in body come out and feverish and head sore comes out and I am feeling chilly and feverish, and I have a headache.

^t -?a
ama
possibly
I think
it

-r

0.

kak t'ong
foot sore

My

momi apheuni nako on comes out and whole body is sore feet are sore and I ache all over
;

hakchil

inka pota ague is probable I see is an attack of ague.

J.V|
1

<^^| ^^6|
yekchil

-ft^t^

this

elkoreul face child Look at that child's face

aneui aheui

poni look
:

it

chyoungi hayetta heavy has made has suffered severely from small-pox.
small-pox

oV^n-^to^in^^lTli;?!^^!^^^
aheuika
child

oumourei ppachye choukcul keeal kenchye naiyetta ,in well having fallen about to die thing saved extricated it was pulled out and saved. child fell into the well
;

EXERCISES,

231

EXERCISE

35 {continued).

tXs'I-

^1
ket thing
to also
is

*]4t
isyanghaii kcsi strange thing nothing strange whatever.

^>t
epso not is

amo
whatever

There
10.-*
)
sai

^^1
sorai

^7l
teutki

5:4
chyot'a
;

4^1naka

^^
teure

3.0}^
poara
see

bird

sound

hearing is good The birds are singing prettily

out go hear go and listen to them.

nameui

mal

teureni

orei

sichyeri

chal

tointa

another's speech

this year heard crops I hear there will be good crops this year.

good

become

saiei

this

period

Dmring
13.

myet pen teuresso several times I have heard this period I have heard several times from home.
chip

keuipyel

home

news

aui monchye tareun tou pen teutko tareun p'yenchi month two times hear and this month letter not former Last month I heard twice, but this month I received no
i

poasso
I

saw

letters.

chikeum

mousam
what

now

What
15.

teurennanya have hcaid news have you now heard

speech

mal

keuipyel
'?

mnanya
is

news Any news

amo

mal

to

mot

teuresso
;

pyei

mal

epso
is

whatever speech also have heard particular speech not not I have heard nothing whatever there is nothing special.
16.

kcu
that

syosik

chasyeihi

teuresso

kechat
false
it is

man
speech

o
is

news
That

have heard clearly news I heard distinctly

not true.

232

COREAN MANUAL.

ExEiiciSE 36.
1.

v^l

6\^}^^
apanim
father

^
py^ng

nai

^M^H
teuressini

my

My
'XT
elleun quickly

sickness father is sick

has entered

y}
ka

^^l

euionen ch'j^enghaye doctor having invited go Go quickly and call the doctor.

4^^

J^vief
onera

come

euiouen
doc-tor

moisye
served

oasso

keuremyen
if
;

has come I have brought the doctor

so
tell

teure entered
to

osiraira

come say
in,

him

come

then.

4.

euioueu
doctor

maik

poko

bye

patak

to

poasso

see and tongue surface pulse also The doctor felt his pulse and examined his tongue.

saw

D.

S] ^i
euiouen doctor

syeika taitan hata severely speech sickness condition makes The doctor states that his illness is quite serious.

mal

t ^

^l.^^

pyeng

^/^

t"^

-t3L
hako
says

yak medicine

pangmoun
recipe

sse

chyoumyensye

hanan

wiitten while giving saying When giving the prescription, he said:

mari speech

fang
boil

sseuko hoan yak to to mekeusio yak pill medicine also use and medicine also eat please Please take the medicine, part in draught and part in pills.

karo
flour

medicine sleep time

tdon mourei t'asye in water hot mixed ^ut this powder in water and take it at bedtime.

yakeun

chal

ttai

masio
drink

EXERCISES.

233

EXEBCISES
pyeng

36 (contmed).

^f7lS ^^^)
cbyoung-hakinan * ch-young-hatai heavy making beavy though make Although his sickness is serious,

sickness

10..

^-^

yak medicine

He
^'-

chyei man mekeumyen natkeitta only if eat will recover dose one will recover if he only takes one dose of medicine.

^)

"d

'^^^
^<^]
touiei

han

}i^^

H}
pap
rice

^52:
meknan

^i
ket thing

J.t
t'ohan

^)^ idi
ch'yeicheung nasso constipation recovered

eating after vomited After vomiting his food, his constipation

was

relieved.

12.

onareun

as for to-day

pota chom nan-teut-heio echei compared little recovered likely makes yesterday To-day he appears somewhat 'better than he was yesterday.

18.

^
p'yeikyeng lung

*;

koa

kankyengeit
livei:

pyengi
sickness

ta
all

liver and His lung and his

teulko enter and

were

afifected,

and.

14

mok koa
neck and

^ 4-fl^)
moureuphi knee

^^
tto

4*1^
pouesye

'^^''l ^l^f
taitari^

ta
all

apha
sore

He

swollen severely suffered severely from a swollen neck and knee.

also

1=1:
yakeul medicine

naimyen naheul-t'e-i-ni t ttameul recovering position if produce eat and sweat If you take medicine and begin to perspire, while recovering

la ^1
mekko

Hj'd

^t1*H
^^1
^'fsf
mara
avoid

16.

4-1 ^^] 7l-^-fa kansyouhako

momeul
body
* Oppositive case.

param ssoichi tepkei wind to shoot hotly preserve and Keep yourself wa^rm and avoid catching cold.
Locative case.

4^

T*e-i-m,

from Ve

(condition) ^ i (nominative),

and ni (which has the

forCe

of*

semicolon).

59

2S4

COBEAN MANUAL.

Exercise
^

37.

ir)
gyonrei
cart

choiineul many priBoners There are many prisoners sitting on the cart.

^^
ouheui above

^^
yere
soi

^^d^

^]%^
fliresso

loaded

keu chyoungei
that

among

saseullo kyelpak with chain bound One of them was bound with an iron cham.

ban

nomeul
person

one

iron

hayeaaa have made

"^t
taran other

^"1-^
choiineun

^^5.
noheuro

^]%^
maiyesao

The

v^ith rope prisoners tied other prisoners were bound with ropes.

5L1

:SXE018Eg.

iS^

EXEBCISES

37 (conHnued).

4^*1
koanoueni
10.

polki thighs officials having investigated after The authorities held ah investigation and flogged

mounchoihan

^^t
m&i whip

^^] ^*|
houei

manhi

^^
them

-3d.
ch'yesgo flogged

many

severely.

koisyou
chief

matko mok paihye meet and neck cut The chief criminal was flogged and beheaded

nomeun
person

choukiko

and
;

kill

11.

^
tou

^-8:
nomeun

hyengpel

nt

^3,
patko

mok

^ ^H
maiye

^*K
choukita
kill

two

tied persons punishment receive and neck The other two were tortured and strangled.

12.

keu
those

namanan remaming

k'al

sseuioue
to

okei

katoasso

knife

The remainder were made

13.

in gaol wear imprisoned wear the cangue and put in prison.

amo
whatever

issamyen ton man Bongsa-rato ikeuiko if be money only gain but lawsuit be If you are rich you will win your lawsuit, but

14.

7} vf -f

jn.

-^M]

6j

^ -^

;^|

7]

epgamyen hyengsyei kananhako if not have influence poor and If you are poor and have no influence you

cf

chiki souipta losing easy will easily lose.

kananhan
poor

sarameun
as for

hangsyang

chiko
loses but

man

The poor man

always always loses, but

pouchya
rich

sarameun haiigsyaug
as for

ikeuichio

yei

keure
thus
is bo.

hao

man

The

yea always win Yea, that rich man always wine.

make

236-

COREAN MANUAL.

Exercise

38.

this

nyangpaneun gentleman
This

pyesal

rank
is

man

koanoueueuu iiopko chye high and that official of high rank; that officer was removed.
is

kallyesso

changed

chyench\'angeisye*
battle-field

He

pyesal Hyeiouko k'eun haycsso established and great rank made obtained distinction in the field and rose to high rank.

kongeul merit

keu
that

chyangsyounan
general

kenarichi mot not to lead That general could not lead his troops properly.
soldier

komisa

chal well

hao

made

4.

-4 J; cf ^f
ssahotaka fought

^ t^ S|
enemy
soldier

7f|

^n]
k'eukei largely

4] -f

^ 4i
tf

chyek-pyeng-enikei

by

p'aihayesso defeated

They were
5.

severely defeated in battle by the enemy.

t^
ehye
that

*i *l

4 -I
on
entire

p'aihaye p'achikhayetta official in battle being defeated degrade from office That officer having been defeated in battle was degraded.

koanoueni

'^l ssahomei

^1 i- i

4^-1

1 ^

nalli

namyen
if

war

arise

narahi nation
State
is

kekchyeng
anxiety
disturbed.

toio

becomes

If

war breaks out the whole

narahi

t'aip'yenghamyen
if

kingdom

peaceful

If there is

paiksyeng p'yetianhao people happy peace the people are happy.

5^;^

6)

^
mot
not

:^

tocheki thieves

The

scattered rebels fled, defeated, in every direction.

kyentaiye enduring

^H ^ *i^
heyechye

B^i^"^ tomanghata
fled

* Ablative case.

EXEECISES.

237

EXERCISE

38 {continued).

tomanghanan
flying

melli cbchocli'ara far off thieves drive off Drive the retreating robbers far av/ay.

tohekeul

10.

kounsa
soldiers

taichyang koa pichyang aireul manhi general and officers suffering many During war the general and the officers suifer severely.

ssahonan
fighting

ttai

ssesso

time

used

11.

>^ 6|

jc

JL

7^

j-

^^

^-j

pyenpangeul chal teureoketeun chikheuio frontier well when enter guard enemy troops When the enemy's troops approach, carefully defend your frontiers.
chyekpyengi
12

t^ v^ 6]
chyekpyengi

c, 5^

JL

7]

^ ^1 ^ ^ ^Hp]
chyenei

-f 6^ ef

enemy

tantani yeipihayera strongly before entry prepare troops Prepare well before the approach of the enemy's troops.
teureoki

13

tA\

si\

oy

paik pen ssahoa to ikeuichi mot hanta yeipi-ani-hamyen prepare not if make hundred times fight though to conquer not make If no preparations are made, defeat will follow, however often you fight

i- '^ t)

^.4 ^
5) /i
toiye

*M ^1 5
:
*J -t

'^

14.

6|.o^
ama
probable

t^^
yere
several

^
nal

days

Probably before

many

toimhakeisso not becoming new officer will take up duty days are over a new magistrate will arrive.

*hH ani

44
sinkoan
paiksyengi people

eHJ:

sinkoaneul

new

official

chal well
official is

mannamyen
if

sal-tteut-ha o
live

If the

new

probably good, the people will have a chance of existing

meet

make

16

t'amhanan
avaricious (But)

koanouen
official
if

mannamyen
if

meet

the

official is

paiksyengi tot'anei people oppression avaricious, they will be oppresbed.

teunta enter

00

COEEAN MANUAL.

Exercise

39.

tto

orita
will
I

yei

also

eome will come

yes
again.

popsyeita let us see Yes, good-bye.

tto,

also

nai

kattaka having gone

I will

elp'it

tora

orita
will

quickly

back

come

come back

directly I get there.

s-

%]

^}^^y}
kariitka
will

nai-il

*H
ani

-2.e
onal to-day
to-day.

^f-S^
kao go

to-morrow

go

Shall I

no go to-morrow? Na, go

1
tal

}^
mata
each
I

moon

sik pen oatta ban each time one came come and go once every month.

^ i
yei

^^

y}-^
kao
go

ban
one

pen time

kaorita
will
I will call

encheitenchi

osio

go once

yes Yes^ come

whenever when you like.

come

6.

7^
kal

S
tteut

?
tto

^jL
hako make and

ojL

7l

5
tto also

-fjt,
hao

go

tteut kal an intention also not go intentioa I don't know whether to go or not.

make

kaketeun if go

mounan-ina erousineikeui* respects some father If y-ou go, give my respects to your father.

hao

make

8.

^2^
orarak aseend

V^?^
narirak

^^7}
hataka

^^^^
tterechyetta
fell

descend
It fell

making when floating up and down.

down

*Dative case.

EXERCISES,

239^

i:XEECWE

39

(fioiitinued),,

^
pai

S.A
teure entered

^t
oattan

mar
speech

"^

ship

There
10-.
i

is

came no news, of the

epso not is

ship's arrival.

kesan
thing

this

ket koa thing wi^h^ This, is different |rom what I prd^yed, nai
I

haran
said

taUa
^igerent;

11

as for

nenan you

nai
I

sikin

ordered
all

Have yqu done

kesal ta haj^ennanya thing all hfiye m^de that I ox'dered you to (^o?

ne you

onei

chosimeul
care

chom
little

te

9-ni

hayennany?*,

why
^Vhy

more
little

not

haye madg

hg-ve

you not been a

moy careful?

ne you

oh'inhi

personally

Had
14.

chyok'einnanya, ka poaya will he gopd' having seen go you not better go yourself ^nd see*^

chikeumeun
as for

now

He
15.

nairil omako* eptako * to-morrow will corfte pot h says he has uq time now. but will, come to-morrow-.

kyeral

hatera
s?iy

leisure

naral
xnQ

mot issesye iri pol npt being seeing work I wa^s inyited, but h^-d bu^inss and cpuld not go.
ch'yenghayessitai invited though

kassq
goiie

kakinan as for going

I'll

onareun kakeissitai fis for to.day though will gQ go some time, but I am busy

iri

isse

niot

]^^.o

work

being

not

^Q

tQ=dfty P-nd can't so,

*Ko

indicates closo of

quot.i.tiQriv

240

COKEAN MANUAL.

Exercise 40.

pouekei
in kitchen

There

koa k'eun sot chyekeun ket touri issani and large pot small thing two are are two pots in the kitchen, one large and one small.

^^
pang

^^^
cli'ipta

^1-^ ^1
akoungei
in flue
is

1
poul

room

cold

The room

cold

hoatekei syekt'an nohara fire burn and in stove coal put light the kang and put coal in the stove.
ttaiko

^ 3. ^ ^

"1]

^^

it

e{-

^J: 3f
k'al

7|- ?|-

Pf 5|

7lS.i>}^.:^ 7|.^a|
chyekarak
.fork

6}^
isso

koa syoukarak ta innanka poara knife and spoon all are whether see See if all the knives and spoons are there.

man

only is There are only forks.

ch'akoan
teapot

koa ch'atchyong koa syoulchan maiihi and teacup and wineglass many There are many teapots, teacups, and wineglasses but
;

itko are but

5.

sapal

bowl

koa taichyepeun * sa oaya epsani hakeitta and plates buy having come will make not are There are no bowels or plates. Better buy some, then.

hain servant

4 *! 4 ^ i
pjuUe
call

^1;^^
p'ouiko

poul
fire

moul
fire,

i ^
boil
boil

*|

kkeuriko

^ 4 ^ 4
2|
ch'a tea
tarira

burn and water

and

infuse
tea.

Call

my

servant to light the

some water, and make

chari

chopaneun
breakfast

kachye
bring

oko

chyemsimeun
as for tiffin

neutkei
late
later.

chiera

mat

come and

make

Bring

my

early breakfast, but

make my

tiffin

84i

-^-^^ *|jl>3>a 4^-17)

i"

^Ji.^^^
onera

chyenyelceun kouk kkeuriko saingsyen koa sokoki fish and ox flesh as for evening soup boil and For dinner make some soup and roast some
* Oppositive case.

koue
roast
fish

come
beef.

and

EXEECISES.

241

EXERCISE

40 {continued).

^ ^ t ^-i eH^^l
osnnim
guest

hana one

ch'yaksiri yeipihayera carefully food prepare I have a guest coming, so prepare a good dinner.
okeissini will come

H eumsik 4i

^-^^1*1

^]

*i

rJf

10.

etten

some

tai-in t'ako poiopcha oasye nyangpani pokyo hao came great man let us see chair ride and gentleman says gentleman has cjms in a chair and wants to see you, sir.

nai I

peu'te elmareul* echei kitarinchi moro how much yesterday from to wait not know Since yesterday I have been looking for you ever so much.

tangsineul
sir

12.

^ ^ ^1
oatkeitchi

} ?
manan

^ t "i^^^ts.^^^
keuphan
illo

^^
oasso

was coming 1 was

teurekatta work palace urgent yet entered coming, but went to the Palace on urgent business.

taikouel

came

olchonl

alko

pyenpyench'i-mot-han

eumsikeul

3-eipihayesso

good not make food coming know and prepared I knew you were coming, and prepared a smaU repast.

taichyepeul

welcome

You

koahi hasini excessive make have been so hospitable, I do not

irek'ei

thus

pouranhao uneasy know how to thank you.

in

maamei mind

kyeral issamyen encheitenchi kaorita nai ch'acha taikam leisure if be seek will go whenever I 6 vcellency I will call on Your Excellency whenever you have leisure.

16

-|

4^1 ^%^] ^>^ ^

pyello
iri

f>\^t^ 5f
amo
any
;

S. -^>^|
osio

-^

hangsyang

epsani

ttai-rato

not is always particularly work I navev hive anything special to do

time though
at
anj'

come please

come

time, please.

* Accusative case.

61f

ft

h-tm n:U^:ft

Si'i;;